SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Sage 100 ERP
Customer Upgrade Guide
This is a publication of Sage Software, Inc.
Version 2014
Copyright © 2013 Sage Software, Inc. All rights reserved.
Sage, the Sage logos, and the Sage product and service names mentioned herein are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Sage Software, Inc., or its affiliated entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Business Objects® and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects®, and Crystal Reports® are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. in the United Sates and in other countries. Business Objects
is an SAP company.
Microsoft® and Microsoft SQL Server® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or in other countries.
The names of all other products and services are property of their respective owners.
Your use of this document and the Sage product(s) described herein is governed by the terms and conditions of the
Sage End User License Agreement ("EULA") or other agreement that is provided with or included in the Sage product.
Nothing in this document supplements, modifies or amends those terms and conditions. Except as expressly stated in
those terms and conditions, the information in this document is provided by Sage "AS IS" and Sage disclaims all
express, implied or statutory warranties of any kind, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability, fitness
for a particular purpose or of non-infringement. No implied license is granted to you under any Sage intellectual
property or trade secret right. Sage reserves the right to revise, supplement or remove information in this document at
any time without notice to you or others.
Sage End User License: http://na.sage.com/sage-na/eula
Rev 11
Contents
Chapter 1 — Introduction 1
How to Use This Guide 1
Enhancements 1
Graphic Conventions 2
Text Conventions 2
Chapter 2 — What's New in Version 2014 3
Global Enhancements 3
Auto-Complete 3
Custom Reports 3
Default Column Name in Search Grid Window 3
Accounts Payable Enhancements 4
Invoice List Button in Invoice Data Entry 4
Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry 4
Accounts Receivable Enhancements 4
Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry 4
General Ledger Enhancements 4
Keep Financial Reports Window Open 4
Sage Intelligence Reporting 5
Installation 5
Access within Sage 100 ERP 5
Excel 2010 64-Bit Support 5
.NET Framework 4.0 5
User Interface and Usability Improvements 5
Sage CRM 6
Payroll 7
Chapter 3 — Workflow Changes in 2014 8
Global 8
User Logon Window 8
MAS Office Button 8
Accounts Payable 8
Form 1099 Filing 8
Library Master 8
Report Manager 8
System Configuration 8
User Maintenance 8
Payroll 9
Electronic Form Filing 9
W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes 9
Retired Modules 9
Chapter 4 — Workflow Changes in 2013 10
Global Changes 10
64-Bit ODBC Driver 10
ALE Lookups in Data Entry Windows 10
Feedback Form in Help System 10

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

i
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Installation Changes 10
Native SData Provider 10
Report Changes 10
SAP® Crystal Reports® 11
Sage Advisor Update 11
Installing with Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI) 11
Verify Account Information 11
Accounts Payable Changes 12
Expanded Accounts Payable Invoice Number 12
Inactive Vendors 12
View Cleared Checks in Vendor Maintenance 14
Accounts Receivable Changes 14
Inactive Customers 14
Credit Card Processing 16
Bank Reconciliation Changes 18
Common Information Changes 18
Credit Card Processing Changes 19
PCCharge 19
Customer Relationship Management Changes 20
Automatic Installation of Module 20
Use of Sage 100 ERP License 20
Multiple-company Integration with Sage CRM 20
Quick Order Entry 21
Inventory Management Changes 22
Library Master Changes 22
Credit Card Processing 22
Paperless Office Changes 24
Sales Order Changes 24
Credit Card Processing 24
Visual Integrator Changes 25
Visual Process Flows 25
Retired Modules 25
Module PDFs 25
Chapter 5 — Workflow Changes in 4.50 26
Global Changes 26
Choose an Installation Option 26
Security Requirement 26
Participate in the Product Enhancement Program 26
Retain Report and Form Printer Information Setting 27
Manage Your System Window 27
Accounts Receivable Changes 27
Create National Accounts 27
Define Default Price Levels by Customer and Product Line 28
Purge Credit Card Data During Period-End Processing 28
Define Split Commissions by Customer 28

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

ii
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Recalculate Open Order Amounts 29
Bar Code Changes 29
Print Lot/Serial Distribution Information 29
Inventory Management Changes 29
Inactive Items 29
View Lot/Serial Distribution Information 30
Library Master Changes 30
Define Credit Card Security Options 30
Payroll Changes 31
Recalculate Deductions in Payroll Data Entry 31
Define Deduction Code Options 31
Recalculate All Option for Payroll Imports 32
Select Preconfigured Payroll Import Jobs 32
Define Minimum Hours for Benefit Accrual 32
Identify Business Type 32
Purchase Order Changes 33
Renamed Task 33
View Sales Orders from Purchase Order Entry 33
Set Up Additional Purchase Order/Auto Generate Options 33
Sales Order Changes 34
Set Up Additional Options for Job Cost 34
Calculate Sales Commissions by Line Item 35
Calculate Item Pricing by Total Quantity 35
Distribute Lot/Serial Items from Sales Order Entry 35
Generate Purchase Orders from Sales Orders 36
Assign Vendors to Miscellaneous/Special Items 36
Retired Modules 36
Chapter 6 — Workflow Changes in 4.40.0.X 37
Installation Changes 37
Changes in Version 4.40 37
Global Changes 37
Changes in Version 4.40 37
Library Master Changes 40
Changes in Version 4.40 40
Accounts Payable Changes 41
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.2 41
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 41
Change in Version 4.40 42
Accounts Receivable Changes 42
Change in Version 4.40 42
Bank Reconciliation Changes 42
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.3 42
Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 42
Bar Code Changes 43
Changes in Version 4.40 43
Bill of Materials Changes 43

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

iii
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Changes in Version 4.40 43
Business Insights Changes 45
Changes in Version 4.40 45
Common Information Changes 45
Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 45
Changes in Version 4.40 46
Customizer Changes 47
Changes in Version 4.40 47
eBusiness Manager Changes 48
Changes in Version 4.40 48
General Ledger Changes 48
Changes in Version 4.40 48
Inventory Management Changes 48
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.5 48
Changes in Version 4.40 49
Job Cost Changes 53
Changes in Version 4.40 53
Payroll Changes 54
Change in Product Update 4.40.0.5 54
Change in Version 4.40 54
Purchase Order Changes 54
Changes in Version 4.40 54
Return Merchandise Authorization Changes 59
Change in Version 4.40 59
Sales Order Changes 59
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 59
Changes in Version 4.40 60
Visual Integrator Changes 61
Changes in Version 4.40 61
Work Order Changes 62
Changes in Version 4.40 62
Report Master Changes 63
Changes in Version 4.40 63
Retired Modules 63
Chapter 7 — Workflow Changes in 4.30 64
Installation Changes 64
Global Changes 64
Reports and Forms 64
Selection Grids 64
Library Master Changes 64
Role Maintenance 64
Accounts Receivable Changes 65
Customer Statements 65
Business Insights Changes 65
Business Insights Dashboard 65

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

iv
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Business Insights Reporter 65
Common Information Changes 65
Bank Code Maintenance 65
Payroll Changes 66
Direct Deposits 66
Visual Integrator Changes 66
Job Import 66
Report Master Changes 66
Chapter 8 — Workflow Changes in 4.20 67
Global Changes 67
Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) 67
Desktop 67
Help System and Online Manuals 67
Inquiries 67
Printing 68
Printing to a Dot Matrix Printer 68
Report Master 68
Library Master Changes 68
Batch Faxing 68
Role Maintenance 69
Renamed Task 69
Reports 69
URL Maintenance 70
Accounts Payable Changes 70
Global Changes 70
Data Entry 71
Period End Processing 71
Reports and Forms 71
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 72
Accounts Receivable Changes 73
Memos 73
Business Insights Changes 73
Global Changes 73
Business Insights Explorer 73
Renamed Tasks 73
Common Information Changes 74
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 74
Customizer Changes 74
Global Changes 74
Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media Reporting) 75
Global Changes 75
Fixed Assets Changes 76
Global Changes 76
Payroll Changes 76
Taxes 76
Reports 77

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

v
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Visual Integrator Changes 77
Data Dictionary Listing 77
Import Job Maintenance 77
Retired Modules 77
Chapter 9 — Workflow Changes in 4.10 78
Accounts Receivable Changes 78
Global Changes 78
Period End Processing 78
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 79
Business Insights Changes 79
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 79
Common Information Changes 79
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance 79
Customizer Changes 80
Global Changes 80
eBusiness Manager Changes 82
Global Changes 82
Return Merchandise Authorization Changes 82
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 82
Sales Order Changes 83
Global Changes 83
Sales History 83
Sales History Reports 83
Period End Processing 84
Job Cost Integration 84
Visual Integrator Changes 85
Data Dictionaries 85
Data Dictionary Listing 85
Import Job Maintenance 85
Chapter 10 — Workflow Changes in 4.00 86
Installation Changes 86
Global Changes 86
Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) 86
Desktop 86
Help System and Online Manuals 86
Upgrading Level 3.x Data 86
Module and Accounting Dates 87
Registering Your Modules 87
Security 87
Library Master Changes 87
Changed Tasks 87
Companies 88
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 88
Business Insights Changes 89
Business Insights Reporter 89

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

vi
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Customizer Changes 89
Global Changes 89
General Ledger Changes 89
Accounts 89
Allocations 90
Custom Financials 91
Standard Financials 91
Data Entry 91
Period End Processing 92
Reports 93
Renamed and Removed Tasks 93
Visual Integrator Changes 93
Data Dictionaries 93
Data Dictionary Listing 93
Import Job Maintenance 93
Export Jobs 94
Retired Modules 94
Appendix A — Checklists 95
Upgrade and Conversion Process 95
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 96
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 96
Upgrade Checklist 97
Data Conversion Checklist 98
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 102
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 102
Upgrade Checklist 103
Data Conversion Checklist 104
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 108
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 108
Upgrade Checklist 108
Data Conversion Checklist 109
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 113
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 113
Upgrade Checklist 114
Data Conversion Checklist 115
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 120
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 120
Upgrade Checklist 121
Data Conversion Checklist 123
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 128
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 128
Upgrade Checklist 129
Data Conversion Checklist 131
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 136
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 136
Upgrade Checklist 137

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

vii
Contents
...........................................................................................................................................................................................

Data Conversion Checklist 139
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 143
Pre-Upgrade Checklist 143
Upgrade Checklist 144
Data Conversion Checklist 146

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

viii
Chapter 1
Introduction
Chapter 1

Sage, the recognized leader in business management for small- and
mid-size businesses, welcomes you to Sage 100 ERP 2014.

How to Use This Guide
This guide has been created to ease the process of upgrading your
software. While the extensive new features included in this release have
been designed to improve your workflow and business processes, this
means that the way you use your system may change.
Chapter 2 of this guide contains all the enhancements for this release.
The remaining chapters specifically highlight the differences that you
need to be aware of and the steps you need to take before you begin
using the new system so you can take better advantage of the
improvements. The appendix provides pre-installation and
post-installation checklists to ease the upgrade process.
Review the information in this guide before installing the software. For
more information, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's
Guide. The Installation and System Administrator's Guide can be found in
the Documents folder of the Sage 100 ERP installation program, or by
selecting a product from the Autorun screen, and then clicking
Documentation on the product screen. The guide is in Adobe Acrobat
(PDF) format and is named Sage100ERP_Install.pdf.

Enhancements
For a complete list of enhancements and changes to the software, after
installing, refer to the What's New page and the Release Notices. For the
What's New information, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3.
You can also access the What's New page by clicking What's New on the
Desktop's Resources page. From the What's New page, click Release
Notices to view the Release Notices.
This guide contains the following information you need for a successful
upgrade:


Installation changes



Global changes in the software



Changes to the modules



Pre-installation checklist



Post-installation checklist



Data conversion checklist

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

1
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
How to Use This Guide

Graphic Conventions
The following icons are used throughout this guide to indicate different
types of information.
The NOTE symbol is followed by additional
information about a topic.

The WARNING symbol is followed by information
to help you avoid costly mistakes.

Text Conventions
The following table describes the text conventions used in this guide.
Text Convention

Explanation

Menus

Menus are shown in this format:
Select menu > menu task name.
Examples:



Bold font

Select File menu > Change
Company.
Select General Ledger Budget
menu > Budget Maintenance.

Indicates text entered at a field or text
selected at a field.
Examples:



Italic font

At the Value field, type a search
value, such as 01, for the lookup.
In the Filter window, to delete a
filter, select <none> at a filter's
Column field.

Indicates references to other manuals.
Example:


Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

For more information, refer to your
Installation and System
Administrator's Guide.

2
Chapter 2
What's New in Version 2014
Chapter 2

Global Enhancements
Auto-Complete
An auto-complete feature has been added for customer number, vendor
number, and item code entry fields. You can now locate records by
entering the customer name, vendor name, or item description in the
respective field. As you type, a list of records matching your entry
appears, and you can select a record from the list.
For example, if you have vendors named United Airways, United Paper,
and United Parcel Service, when you type united in the vendor number
field, all three vendors will appear in a list, and you can select the one that
you want.
You can still select records by entering the customer number, vendor
number, and item code.
This feature is automatically enabled for all users. To disable the feature
for all users, clear the Enable Auto-Complete check box in Library Master
> System Configuration. You can also disable the feature for individual
users in Library Master > User Maintenance.

Custom Reports
The following check boxes will now appear on custom report windows:


Keep Window Open After Print



Keep Window Open After Preview

You can select these check boxes so that the windows do not
automatically close after printing or previewing reports.

Default Column Name in Search Grid Window
To make searching easier when using the Search Grid window, the
default value in the Column Name field is now the first column in the grid.
For example, in Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry, when you click the
Find Row button to open the Search Grid window, Check No. is now the
default value in the Column Name field.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

3
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Enhancements

Accounts Payable Enhancements
Invoice List Button in Invoice Data Entry
An Invoice List button has been added to the Invoice Data Entry window.
You can now click that button to view a list of all invoices in the data entry
table.

Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry
A Repetitive Invoice List button has been added to the Repetitive Invoice
Entry window. You can now click that button to view a list of all invoices in
the data entry table.

Accounts Receivable Enhancements
Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry
You no longer have to select a customer before selecting a repetitive
invoice in Repetitive Invoice Entry. You can now click the Repetitive
Invoices button to view and select from a list of repetitive invoices.

General Ledger Enhancements
Keep Financial Reports Window Open
A Keep Window Open check box has been added to the Financial
Reports window. If you select that check box, the Financial Reports
window will no longer automatically close after clicking Proceed and then
closing the Print Financial Reports window.
Two check boxes have been added to the Print Financial Reports window:


Keep Window Open After Print



Keep Window Open After Preview

You can now select these check boxes so that the window does not
automatically close after printing or previewing reports.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

4
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sage Intelligence Reporting

Sage Intelligence Reporting
NOTE
Excel 2007,
2010, or 2013 is
required to use
the version of
Sage Intelligence
Reporting
included with
Sage 100 ERP
2014.

Installation
The Sage Intelligence Reporting installation program is now part of the
Sage 100 ERP Workstation Setup program. Sage Intelligence Reporting
is automatically installed when you run Workstation Setup and select the
Typical installation option.

Access within Sage 100 ERP
Sage Intelligence Reporting is now accessed from the Sage 100 ERP
Module Menus toolbar and the Tasks tab.

Excel 2010 and Excel 2013 64-Bit Support
Sage Intelligence Reporting is now compatible with the 64-bit version of
Excel 2010 and Excel 2013.

.NET Framework 4.0
Sage Intelligence Reporting has been upgraded to .NET Framework 4.0,
resulting in smoother integration with Excel and faster installation time if
.NET Framework 4.0 is already installed.

User Interface and Usability Improvements
Numerous enhancements were made to Sage Intelligence Reporting to
make the product more efficient and easy to use. These improvements
include the following:

User Interface


Report Manager menu items have been reorganized to make
commonly used features easier to find. The most commonly used
items are grouped on the Home and Help tabs. Less frequently used
items are grouped on the File and Tools tabs.



Connector menu items have been reorganized; more commonly used
items are now available on the File, Home, and Help tabs. Less
commonly used features are now on the Tools tab.



The locked report screen and the Unlock on Copy screen have been
updated to display information in a more user-friendly manner.

Report Designer


The new Report Designer Add-in gives you better control over
reporting layouts. You can now break reports into reusable pieces and
reassemble them in different configurations to create new reports.



You can now maximize the Report Designer window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

5
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sage CRM



Rows and columns are now ordered alphabetically, and they are
easier to rearrange. Also, larger fonts are now used, and the row and
column placeholder bars within the selected row and column layout
are now wider to accommodate longer field names.



You can now insert column or row fields at a specific location within
your layout instead of inserting it at the end of the column or row and
then moving it.



Text columns added to a layout are now automatically resized based
on their content.



You can now add and delete row reporting groups from within the
Mapping Tool.

Report Manager


The columns that appear in Report Manager when a report is selected
are now automatically resized so that all text with the columns is
visible.



When importing a report that includes a container with the same name
as an existing container, you can now rename the container to avoid
having two containers with the same name.



The right-click menus have been simplified and more intuitive labels
have been added. The options that have been removed are still
available on the Report Manager Ribbon.

Report Viewer


The Report Viewer now remains open after running a report.



A minimum window size has been set for the Report viewer so that all
available reports are visible.

Sage CRM
Sage CRM customization has been enhanced to take advantage of the
new features in Sage CRM 7.2. For more information, review the Sage
CRM 7.2 Installation and Upgrade Guide. To access this guide, click the
Documentation link on the Sage CRM 7.2 for Sage 100 ERP 2014
Autorun screen.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

6
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll

Payroll
Employer Medical Assistance Contribution (MAC) fields have been added
to P/R Tax Table Maintenance. The fields appear when Massachusetts is
entered in the State field. You can enter a rate for the Employer MAC, but
the accrual account, limit, and limit type fields display what you have
entered for the unemployment tax and can only be viewed.
The Employer MAC amount is included with the unemployment tax on the
Employer’s Expense Summary, but it is separated into its own column on
the Quarterly Tax Report.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

7
Chapter 3
Workflow Changes in 2014
Chapter 3

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated into the
product for the 2014 release that you should be aware of. Installation and
global changes are listed first followed by module changes and
retirements.

Global
MAS Office Button
The MAS Office button has been removed from the Job Cost, Payroll,
Material Requirements Planning, and Work Order modules.

Accounts Payable
Form 1099 Filing
The Form 1099 eFiling and Reporting task, which is located on the
Reports menu, is now the only option available for electronic filing of 1099
forms. The Electronic Reporting module has been retired.

Library Master
Report Manager
The following fields have been removed from the New Report window that
appears when creating a new report in Report Manager:


Report Type



Report Master Name

By default, Crystal Report is the only available report type.

System Configuration
The Web Services tab has been renamed; it is now the Preferences tab.

User Maintenance
Two fields, Email and Job Title, have been added to the User
Maintenance window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

8
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll

Payroll
Electronic Form Filing
The Federal eFiling and Reporting and State eFiling and Reporting tasks,
located on the Payroll Period End menu, are now the only options
available for electronically filing payroll tax forms. The Electronic
Reporting module has been retired.

W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes
The W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes task has been renamed W2
Puerto Rico Mapping Maintenance. Also, the task has been relocated to
the Payroll Setup menu. The task was previously part of the Electronic
Reporting module.

Retired Modules
The Electronic Reporting module has been retired.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

9
Chapter 4
Workflow Changes in 2013
Chapter 4

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated into the
product for the 2013 release that you should be aware of. Installation and
global changes are listed first followed by module changes and
retirements.

Global Changes
64-Bit ODBC Driver
A 64-bit ODBC driver, which allows third-party 64-bit applications to
access Sage 100 ERP data, is now available. The installation program for
the driver can be run from the Sage 100 ERP — Applications installation
program.

ALE Lookups in Data Entry Windows
You can now select whether to display or hide inactive customers and
vendors in some ALE lookups. These options can be selected in
Company Maintenance.

Feedback Form in Help System
A feedback form has been added to all Help System topics. You can now
indicate whether a topic is helpful and provide anonymous feedback that
will be used to improve product documentation.

Installation Changes
When uninstalling Sage 100 ERP, your company data is no longer
deleted. To remove the data, you must manually delete it from the MAS90
folder.

Native SData Provider
You can now use SData, an HTTP-based communication protocol, to
communicate with the workstation, server, and web-based applications,
as well as third-party applications and the World Wide Web.
SData is enabled in System Configuration, and security is assigned by
role for each user in Role Maintenance.

Report Changes
You can no longer e-mail report data when selecting the Export option in
the Printer/Output field in report windows. For information on e-mailing a
report using Paperless Office functionality, see E-mail, Fax, or Print a
Report as a PDF in the Help system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

10
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Global Changes

SAP® Crystal Reports®
SAP Crystal Reports 2011 is now included with Sage 100 ERP.
Enhancements in version 2011 include a .NET runtime engine
component, the ability to export directly to an Excel .xlsx file, Adobe Flash
integration, built-in bar code support, and enhanced SAP Crystal Reports
Designer features.

Sage Advisor Update
You can now keep your Sage products up to date with the latest releases
and updates. Sage Advisor Update reviews the Sage products you have
installed on your server and lists the online updates available for
download.
Sage Advisor Update is automatically installed and can be launched from
your Program Files > Sage folder, and from the icon located in the system
tray. For more information, see the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrators Guide.

Installing with Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI)
Sage 100 ERP is now installed using Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI).
MSI will provide a single installation per version on your system; multiple
instances cannot be installed.

Verify Account Information
You no longer have to enter information in the Verify Account Information
window when verifying information for the following tasks:


1099 eFiling and Reporting



Federal eFiling and Reporting



State eFiling and Reporting

The required information will automatically be transmitted when you click
OK.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

11
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes

Accounts Payable Changes
Expanded Accounts Payable Invoice Number


The invoice number field is now expanded to 20 characters, from 10
characters in previous releases.



Reports and listings now display the full invoice number while retaining
the portrait orientation. Journals, register, updates, inquiries, lookups,
explorer views, and data entry programs will also display the full
invoice number.



The 20-character invoice number can be viewed in the Job Cost and
General Ledger comments on reports.



The full invoice number will be printed on the check stubs.

Inactive Vendors


In Vendor Maintenance, the Temporary check box has been replaced
with a Vendor Status drop-down list that contains Active, Inactive, and
Temporary statuses. The Inactive option allows you to prevent users
from selecting inactive vendors in the following tasks:


Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance



A/P Invoice Data Entry



Manual Check and Payment Entry



A/P Repetitive Invoice Entry



Salesperson Maintenance



Item Maintenance



Job Masterfile Maintenance (for cost codes only)



Job Posting Entry (for direct costs only)



Purchase Order Entry



Receipt of Goods Entry



Receipt of Invoice Entry



Return of Goods Entry



RMA Entry



RMA Receipts Entry



Sales Order Entry



S/O Invoice Data Entry




AP from AR Clearing Entry



Work Order Transaction Entry (for outside processing charges only)

A new field, Inactive Reason, has been added to the Additional tab in
Vendor Maintenance. Use this field to add a reason code for an
inactive vendor.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

12
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes



A new Inactive Status Exception List window allows you to view and
print a list of reasons why the vendor status cannot be changed to
Inactive. You can also drill down to the source document, if applicable.
This window appears after clicking Details if a message dialog box
warns you that the vendor status cannot be changed.



A change to a vendor’s status will appear on the Vendor Audit Report if
All or Changes is selected in the Vendor Changes to Track field on the
History tab in Accounts Payable Options.



A security event has been added to allow the selection of inactive
vendors in Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance and to allow
the selection of inactive vendors’ invoices in Invoice Payment
Selection.



You can now select to include or exclude inactive vendors from Vendor
Listing, Vendor Listing with Balances, and Vendor Mailing Labels.



A new column, Status, has been added to some ALE vendor lookups.
This field allows you to group and filter inactive, temporary, and active
vendors.



A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to
the Setup menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for
inactive vendors. A pre-defined reason code, OUTOB (Out of
Business), has been added and cannot be deleted.
These reason codes are shared with the Accounts Receivable module
for use with inactive customer records. The Inactive Reason Code
Maintenance task is also available on the Accounts Receivable Setup
menu and the Common Information Main menu.



A new utility, Remove Inactive Vendors, has been added to the Utilities
menu. This utility allows you to delete inactive vendors.



In Vendor Maintenance, the Temporary Vendor check box has been
replaced with a Vendor Status drop-down list and moved to the
Additional tab. You can now select a status of Active, Inactive, or
Temporary.



Active has now replaced Permanent as a vendor status. Any
permanent vendors are converted to active vendors during data
conversion.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

View Cleared Checks in Vendor Maintenance


Two new fields have been added in Vendor Maintenance that will allow
you to view check status information on checks that have cleared the
bank in Bank Reconciliation. The ability to view the cleared checks in
Vendor Maintenance can be enabled on the Main tab in Accounts
Payable Options if the Accounts Payable module is integrated with
Bank Reconciliation. Viewing cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance
applies only to checks processed in version 2013 or higher.



You can now post ACH electronic payments in detail to the Bank
Reconciliation module. This feature is enabled in Accounts Payable
Options if Accounts Payable is integrated with Bank Reconciliation.

Accounts Receivable Changes
Inactive Customers


In Customer Maintenance, the Temporary check box has been
replaced with a Customer Status drop-down list that contains Active,
Inactive, and Temporary statuses. The Inactive option allows you to
prevent users from selecting inactive customers in the following tasks:


AP from AR Clearing Entry



Cash Receipts Entry



Finance Charge Entry



A/R Invoice Data Entry



Repetitive Invoice Entry



User ID Maintenance



Job Billing Data Entry



Job Estimate Maintenance



Job Masterfile Maintenance (for open jobs only)



Material Requirements Planning



Maintain Projected Demands



RMA Entry



RMA Receipts Entry



S/O Invoice Data Entry



Sales Order Entry



A new field, Inactive Reason, has been added to the Additional tab in
Customer Maintenance that allows you to add a reason code for the
inactive customer.



A new Inactive Status Exception List window allows you to view and
print a list of reasons why the customer status cannot be changed to
Inactive. You can also drill down to the source document, if applicable.
This window appears after clicking Details if a message dialog box
warns you that the customer status cannot be changed.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

14
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes



A change to a customer’s status will appear on the Customer Audit
Report if All or Changes is selected in the Customer Changes to Track
field on the History tab in Accounts Receivable Options.



A security event as been added to allow the entry of an inactive
customer when adding a line in Cash Receipts Entry.



You can now select to include or exclude inactive customers from
Statement Printing, Customer Listing, Customer Listing with Balances,
and Customer Mailing Labels.



A new column, Status, has been added to some ALE customer
lookups. This field allows you to group and filter inactive, temporary,
and active customers.



A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to
the Setup menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for
inactive customers. Additionally, an OUTOB (Out of Business)
pre-defined reason code has been added and cannot be deleted.
These reason codes are shared with the Accounts Payable module for
use with inactive vendor records. The Inactive Reason Code
Maintenance task is also available on the Accounts Payable Setup
menu and the Common Information Main menu.



A new utility, Remove Inactive Customers, has been added to the
Utilities menu. This utility allows you to delete inactive customers.



In Customer Maintenance, the Temporary Customer check box has
been replaced with a Customer Status drop-down list and moved to
the Additional tab. You can now select a status of Active, Inactive, or
Temporary.



Active has now replaced Permanent as a customer status. Any
permanent customers are converted to active customers during data
conversion.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

15
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

Credit Card Processing
You can now integrate with Sage Exchange to secure your customers’
credit card numbers in a Sage Exchange Vault account, which is a
PCI-compliant location for storing sensitive credit card and banking
information.
For an overview of this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing
Changes on page 19.
Included in the numerous Accounts Receivable changes:


You can now process credit card transactions in A/R Invoice Data
Entry.



In Repetitive Invoice Entry, you can store credit card transactions to be
processed when the invoice is processed.



You can swipe credit cards for payment acceptance.



You can process credit card transactions in a batch.



You can view credit card payment information in the Payment
Information window for a selected invoice.



Printed invoices now reflect credit card payments.



Because credit card numbers are no longer stored in Sage 100 ERP,
the following fields have been removed:


The Purge Credit Card Data field in A/R Period End Processing



The Days to Retain Credit Card History field in Accounts Receivable
Options (previously used in conjunction with the purging of credit
card data during period end processing)

The following sections list additional changes separated by task.

Payment Type Maintenance


The Show Validation Code Verification and Show Address Verification
check boxes have been combined and renamed Show Address and
CVV Verification.



The Merchant ID field has been renamed Merchant Account.



The following fields have been added for entering Sage Exchange
account information.





Virtual Terminal ID
Merchant Key

The following fields have been removed; the settings are now defined
in Sage Exchange.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

16
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes





Validation Code Length
Require Validation Code

The following PCCharge related fields have been removed:


Credit Card Processor Code



Processor Type

Customer Maintenance


In Customer Maintenance, a Card ID field has been added to the
Additional tab for entering a unique card ID number to identify credit
card records. You can now add a credit card on the fly by typing a new
card ID number in this field to launch Customer Credit Card
Maintenance.



The CC Number field has been removed. Credit card numbers are
now entered in the Sage Exchange Vault window, accessed from
Customer Credit Card Maintenance.



The CC Pymt Type field has been renamed Payment Type.

Customer Credit Card Maintenance


The Add New Card button has been added to open the Sage
Exchange Vault window for adding a credit card number and expiration
date.



The Edit Card button has been added to open the Sage Exchange
Vault window for editing the expiration date of the current credit card
record.



The CC Pymt Type field has been renamed Payment Type.



The Card Number field has been removed.



A Card ID field has been added, which allows you to enter a card ID
number to identify a credit card.



The following view-only fields have been added; they display
information for credit cards entered in the Sage Exchange Vault.


Card Type



Last Four Digits



The Expiration Date is now a view-only field; it displays the expiration
date for the credit card number entered in the Sage Exchange Vault
window.



The following fields have been added:


Address (second line)

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

17
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Bank Reconciliation Changes



Country



E-mail Address

Reports
The Print Formatted Credit Card check box has been removed from the
following Accounts Receivable report windows. The last four digits of the
credit card number will still appear on the reports.


Customer Listing



Customer Credit Card Listing



Deposit Transaction Report

Bank Reconciliation Changes


A new field, Cleared Date, has been added to all data entry tasks in
this module. You can enter a date when the check has cleared the
bank if the date is different than the module default date. The cleared
date can be viewed in registers and reports when reconciling the bank
statement. The field is available for inclusion in Auto Check
Reconciliation check settings.



ACH electronic payments can now be listed in Reconcile Bank and
Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry based on the selection made in
Accounts Payable Options. If the option is selected, ACH payments
will be listed on the Checks tab. If the option is cleared, one posting will
be listed on the Dep/Adjust tab.

Common Information Changes


A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to
the Main menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for
inactive customers and vendors. Additionally, an OUTOB (Out of
Business) pre-defined reason code has been added and cannot be
deleted.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

18
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Credit Card Processing Changes

Credit Card Processing Changes
Integrated credit card processing is now available exclusively through
Sage Sage Payment Solutions via Sage Exchange. PCCharge is no
longer integrated with Sage 100 ERP.
With Sage Exchange, credit card numbers are stored in the Sage
Exchange Vault. Credit card numbers are no longer stored in Sage 100
ERP; only the last 4 digits are stored. Therefore, credit card encryption is
no longer required in Sage 100 ERP.
If credit card numbers were stored in the prior version of your software,
and you were not processing transactions using Sage Exchange, the
credit card numbers will be transferred into a Sage Exchange Vault-only
account, which cannot be used for processing transactions. The
Vault-only account is automatically created during data conversion, and it
can be converted to a processing account. To convert the account,
contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive or your Sage
business partner.
For information on Accounts Receivable changes related to this
enhancement, see Credit Card Processing on page 16.
For information on Library Master changes related to this enhancement,
see Credit Card Processing on page 22.
For information on Sales Order changes related to this enhancement, see
Credit Card Processing on page 24.

PCCharge
The Sage Payment Solutions Gateway does not recognize outstanding
pre-authorizations performed with other processors that previously used
PCCharge Payment Server. Sales are processed through Sage
Exchange as though no pre-authorization was performed. The available
credit for your customers is reduced by the pending pre-authorization
amount until the date of pre-authorization expiration.
WARNING
Verify that any
existing
PCCharge credit
card transactions
have been
updated to the
general ledger.

If you have existing PCCharge credit card transactions, verify that all
transactions entered in Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry and
Sales Order Invoice Data Entry have been updated to the general ledger.
If you have existing PCCharge credit card transactions, print the Accounts
Receivable Credit Card Settlement Report to balance the settlement
batches for the PCCharge processor. PCCharge settlement data will no
longer be included in the Credit Card Settlement Report.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

19
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Customer Relationship Management Changes

Customer Relationship Management Changes
Automatic Installation of Module
The Customer Relationship Management module is now automatically
installed with Library Master and no longer has to be activated.
Previously, you were required to install the module separately and
activate it in Company Maintenance.

Use of Sage 100 ERP License
Launching a Sage 100 ERP task from Sage CRM no longer uses a Sage
100 ERP license.

Multiple-company Integration with Sage CRM
You can now integrate multiple Sage 100 ERP companies with one
instance of Sage CRM, or you can continue using multiple instances of
Sage CRM. If you were previously using multiple instances of Sage CRM
for integration with multiple Sage 100 ERP companies, see the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
The following changes related to that enhancement have been made in
the Customer Relationship Management module.


The CRM Options task as been replaced with two new tasks on the
Customer Relationship Management Main menu: CRM Server Options
and CRM Company Options.


Use CRM Server Options to define settings for each instance of
Sage CRM.



Use CRM Company Options to define company-specific settings for
each company linked to Sage CRM.



CRM Activity Log data can now be sorted and filtered by the Sage 100
ERP company code and Sage CRM instance ID.



When running the Purge CRM Activity Log utility, you can now purge
data for a specified Sage 100 ERP company and Sage CRM instance
ID or for all companies and instance IDs.



When running the Purge CRM Order/Quote Tracking utility, you can
now purge data for a specified Sage 100 ERP company code or for all
companies.



When generating the CRM Activity Log, you can now select data
based on the Sage 100 ERP company code and Sage CRM instance
ID.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

20
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Customer Relationship Management Changes



A Sage 100 ERP Company Code field has been added to the following
windows, which are accessed from Sage CRM.


Create New Sage CRM Quote



Create New Sage CRM Order



Create Relationship



Maintain Relationship



Promote Company to Customer



The CRM Country Maintenance task has been renamed CRM Country
Cross Reference Maintenance.



When creating a sales order or quote within Sage CRM, a
Sage 100 ERP company must now be selected.

Quick Order Entry
In Sage 100 Advanced and Premium ERP, you can now install and use
Quick Order Entry to enter and edit sales orders and quotes in Sage
CRM. This task has the essential fields and functionality available in
Sales Order Entry. Some fields and functionality have been omitted to
streamline the data entry process.
Orders and quotes can be printed to PDF and sent as e-mail attachments
from Quick Order Entry. The location for storing the PDF files and the
URL for viewing them are entered in the Reports Folder and Reports
Portal fields in CRM Company Options.
You can elect to use either Quick Order Entry or the standard Sales Order
Entry window by selecting an option in the Default Form for
Quotes/Orders field on the ERP Preferences tab in Sage CRM. You must
have the appropriate security set up in Sage 100 ERP to access the new
window.
For information on installing Quick Order Entry, see the Installing Sage
CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

21
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Management Changes

Inventory Management Changes
In Item Maintenance, a Quantities grid has been added to the Main tab.
The grid allows you to view the quantity detail information for the selected
item and all warehouses. You can click the Quantity Recap button to view
a recap for all warehouses or the selected warehouse. Additionally, the
following fields have been moved to the Additional tab to accommodate
the Quantities grid.


Allow Back Orders



Allow Trade Discounts



Allocate Landed Cost



Inactive Item

Library Master Changes
Web Reports Server
The Web Reports Server Name field and the Web Reports Virtual
Directory field have been removed from Company Maintenance. Web
Reports Server is no longer supported.

Credit Card Processing
Several changes were made as part of the credit card enhancements.
The following sections list these changes separated by task.

Company Maintenance
The following credit card related changes have been made in Company
Maintenance:


The Servers tab has been renamed to Credit Cards tab.



The Enable Credit Card Payment Server field has been replaced with
the Enable Credit Card Processing check box; selecting this check box
enables credit card processing through Sage Exchange.



The Enable Batch Authorizations check box has been replaced with
the Default Transactions to Process in Batch check box. If this check
box is selected, credit cards are batch processed by default in
Accounts Receivable and Sales Order.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

22
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes



The following PCCharge related fields have been removed:


Use Default Server Settings



IP Address



Port



Path



Force Reconnect for Each Authorization



Two new fields, Vault-Only ID and Vault-Only Key, will appear on the
Credit Cards tab if a Vault-Only account is created to store credit card
numbers. The ID and key will automatically be entered in these fields.



The Credit Card Encryption button has been removed.

User Maintenance
The following check boxes have been removed from the Preferences tab:


Display Formatted Credit Card



Print Formatted Credit Card

Role Maintenance


A security event has been added to allow users to override the credit
card information for Accounts Receivable and Sales Order credit
memos.



A module option has been added that allows users to add new credit
card numbers and edit the expiration date for existing credit card
numbers on file.

The following security events have been removed:


Allow Access to Credit Card Encryption in Company Maintenance



Allow Deleting of Public Key



Allow Purging of Credit Card Audit Log

Credit Card Audit Log
Credit Card Audit Log has been removed from the Library Master Reports
menu.

Administrative Tools
The Change Credit Card Encryption Key Phrase button has been
removed from the Administrative Tools window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

23
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Paperless Office Changes

Paperless Office Changes
You can now use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) authentication to
send e-mail messages. This includes Transport Layer Security (TLS) and
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) mail services to encrypt the communication
between the client and server and protect sensitive company information.
This option can be enabled in Company Maintenance.

Sales Order Changes
Credit Card Processing
You can now integrate with Sage Exchange to secure your customers’
credit card numbers in a Sage Exchange Vault account, which is a
PCI-compliant location for storing sensitive credit card and banking
information.
For an overview of this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing
Changes on page 19.
The following changes were made as part of the credit card processing
enhancement:


You can now swipe credit cards for payment acceptance.



Credit cards transactions can now be processed in a batch.



Printed sales orders and invoices now reflect credit card payments.

The following sections describe additional changes separated by task.

Sales Order Entry


You can now obtain a pre-authorization for an amount that is greater or
less than the order amount.



The Payment Type field on the Totals tab has been renamed Deposit
Payment Type to avoid confusion with the Payment Type field on the
Credit Card tab.



The Deposit check box, Credit Card Number field, and Credit Card
Information button have been removed from the Totals tab.

S/O Invoice Data Entry


The Payment Type field on the Totals tab has been renamed Deposit
Payment Type to avoid confusion with the Payment Type field on the
Credit Card tab.



The Deposit check box, Credit Card Number field, and Credit Card
Information button have been removed from the Totals tab.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

24
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Integrator Changes

Visual Integrator Changes
The option to export fully formatted credit card numbers has been
removed from the Export Job window.

Visual Process Flows
Visual process flows are interactive workflow diagrams that show the
steps to complete a task or process. Elements on the process flows are
linked to Sage 100 ERP tasks; clicking an element starts the linked task.
Other actions, such as showing or hiding objects on the process flow, can
also be assigned to elements.
Seven predefined process flows are available on the Visual Process
Flows submenus. You can use these predefined process flows as
templates to create your own customized process flows, which appear on
the Custom Process Flows menu in the applicable modules.
The Visual Process Flows Manager task, located on the Visual Process
Flows Setup menu, allows you to create, copy, and delete custom
process flows, modify their settings, and open them in the Visual Process
Flow Designer.
Internet Explorer version 8 or higher and Adobe Flash Player are required
to use the process flows.

Retired Modules
The Business Alerts Professional module has been retired as of version
2013.

Module PDFs
The Module PDFs that contained the overview topics for Sage 100 ERP
tasks are no longer accessed in the Help system; they are now accessed
through the Resources page on the Desktop.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

25
Chapter 5
Workflow Changes in 4.50
Chapter 5

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.50 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global
changes are listed first followed by module changes and retirements.

Global Changes
Choose an Installation Option
You now have the option to perform an in-place or parallel upgrade
installation. If you select to perform a parallel upgrade, use the Parallel
Migration wizard to move your data. An in-place installation can only be
performed for version 4.40.
The following products are now available on one DVD:









Sage 100 Standard ERP
Sage 100 Advanced ERP
Sage 100 Premium ERP
Sage CRM
eBusiness Manager
eBusiness Web Services
Federal and State eFiling and Reporting
SAP Crystal Reports® Designer

Security Requirement
You are now required to set up security for your Sage 100 ERP system.
When installing the software, you are now required to create an
Administrator password. Each user must have a user logon created in
User Maintenance in order to access the system.

Participate in the Product Enhancement Program
You can now participate in the Product Enhancement Program (PEP).
Through PEP, Sage collects information that will help Sage identify trends
and usage patterns to improve the quality of the products and services we
offer. Sage will not collect sensitive information such as financial
information or information on individual transactions.
When installing or upgrading to a new version of Sage 100 ERP, you will
be automatically enrolled in PEP. You can opt out at any time using the
Product Enhancement Program window accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

26
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

Retain Report and Form Printer Information Setting
You can now retain report and form printer information by workstation ID
and form code. This new functionality enables multiple users to save the
printer information specific to their workstation ID when selecting a form
code or report setting. Previously, the printer used by the last user of a
form code or report setting was saved for the next user.

Manage Your System Window
The Manage Your System Window no longer appears when starting your
Sage 100 ERP system. The tasks that were available through this
window, Company Maintenance, Role Maintenance, and User
Maintenance, can be accessed from the Library Master Main menu or
through the Administrative Tools window, which appears when you log on
using the Administrator account.

Accounts Receivable Changes
Create National Accounts
A new feature has been added that allows you to create national
accounts. National accounts allow you to create relationships between a
bill-to account and its sold-to customers. Various fields have been added
to Accounts Receivable Options that enable the use of national accounts.


Use the new Bill To Customer Maintenance task on the Accounts
Receivable Setup menu to set up relationships between a national
account and its sold-to customers. Any customer can be a national
account or be a member of a national account.



Use the new Bill To/Sold To Maintenance task accessed from the
Customer Maintenance window to create tiers of bill-to and sold-to
customers.



You now have the option to print bill-to/sold-to information on various
reports and forms. Additionally, bill-to/sold-to information can be
printed in Statement Printing.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

27
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

Define Default Price Levels by Customer and Product
Line
A new feature has been added that allows you to define default price
levels by customer and product line. Default price levels for the customer
can be set up by product line only, a combination of product line and price
code, or product line and ship-to code. Two fields have been added to
Sales Order Options that enable the default price level by customer and
product line feature based on price codes or ship-to codes.


A new task, Price Level by Customer Maintenance, accessed from
either the Accounts Receivable Setup menu, from Customer
Maintenance, or from Product Line Maintenance, allows you to
establish default price levels to use when entering sales orders and
one-step sales order invoices.



You can copy all or specific product line/price level records from a
customer to one or multiple customers using the new task, Price Level
by Customer Copy, on the Accounts Receivable Setup menu, or by
using the Copy button in Price Level by Customer Maintenance. You
can also copy from a customer with existing records to a single
customer by selecting Price Level from the drop-down menu in
Customer Maintenance to open Price Level by Customer Maintenance
and clicking Copy From.



A new report, Customer Pricing Report, has been added to the
Accounts Receivable Reports menu that allows you to produce a list of
customers’ special pricing and discounts, including customers that
have been set up with product line/price level records.

Purge Credit Card Data During Period-End Processing
You can now define what credit card data is purged during Accounts
Receivable period-end processing and year-end processing. A new field
in the Period End Processing window allows you to purge either data for
expired credit cards only, credit card history only, expired credit card data
and credit card history, or you can choose to not purge any credit card
information.

Define Split Commissions by Customer
You can now define default percentage values for distributing sales order
and invoice commissions among salespersons on a per-customer basis.
Clicking the new Split Comm button in Customer Maintenance opens the
Customer Split Commission Maintenance window, which allows you to
distribute commissions among a maximum of five salespersons. The
default values defined in this window appear in the Split Commission
Entry window accessed through Sales Order Entry and Sales Order
Invoice Data Entry, but they can be changed.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

28
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Bar Code Changes

The Split Comm button is available in Customer Maintenance if the Split
Commissions Between Salespersons check box is selected in Sales
Order Options.

Recalculate Open Order Amounts
The Recalculate Open Order Amounts utility has been added to the
Accounts Receivable Utilities menu. This utility allows you to recalculate
the open order amounts from the Customer file for all customers based on
open orders in the Sales Order data entry tasks.

Bar Code Changes
Print Lot/Serial Distribution Information
New fields in Sales Order Options allows you to enable lot/serial
distribution for sales orders. When enabled, you now have the option to
print the lot/serial number and distribution on sales orders and picking
sheets.

Inventory Management Changes
Inactive Items
In Item Maintenance, an Inactive Item check box has been added that
allows you to prevent users from selecting inactive items in certain data
entry tasks. The following data entry tasks check for inactive items as
noted:


In Sales Order Entry, Sales Order Invoice Data Entry, Purchase Order
Entry, Receipt of Goods Entry, Receipt of Invoice Entry, and Material
Requisition Issue Entry, an inactive item cannot be entered when
adding a new line.



In Return of Goods Entry and Inventory Management Transaction
Entry, an inactive item cannot be entered when adding a new line
without the appropriate security setup.



In RMA Entry and RMA Receipts Entry, an inactive item cannot be
selected as a replacement item.



In Shipping Data Entry, an inactive item cannot be selected as an
alternate item.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

29
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes

An Inactive Item check box has also been added to the Product Line
Maintenance window, which allows you to have the Inactive Item check
box in Item Maintenance selected by default for new items added to a
product line. You can also use the Apply Product Line Information window
to apply the Inactive Item check box selection to existing items in Item
Maintenance.
You can now elect to include or exclude inactive items from most
Inventory Management reports.

View Lot/Serial Distribution Information


In Item Maintenance/Item Inquiry, on the Cost Detail tab, you can now
view the committed quantities to various data entry tasks as well as the
quantity available if the Lot/Serial Distribution feature in Sales Order
Options is enabled. Additionally, on the Orders tab, you can now view
the order detail by lot/serial number when clicking the View/Lot Serial
button.



A new Lot/Serial Order Detail window has been added to the
drop-down menu in Item Maintenance/Item Inquiry. This window
displays the lot/serial distribution (including available quantities) for the
selected item as well as the distribution already assigned to sales
orders and the sales order items still waiting to be distributed.



You now have the option to print lot and serial distributions from sales
orders on the Stock Status Report, Open Sales Order Report, Open
Orders by Item Report, Open Orders by Promise Date Report, and
Open Orders by Job Report.

Library Master Changes
Define Credit Card Security Options




The alternate
directory feature
is not available
for Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Two new security event roles have been added in Role Maintenance to
allow you to designate which roles can change or delete the key used
to encrypt credit card numbers. Industry standards recommend that
you change this key at least annually to enhance security of the
encrypted credit card numbers stored in your system.



NOTE

Two new preferences have been added in User Maintenance to allow
you to designate users that can print or display fully formatted credit
card numbers. Users without those preferences will see only the
masked credit card number.

The key used to encrypt the credit card information is now stored
separately from your company data. By using the alternate directory
feature, your key will be stored in a different physical location than your
company data; thereby, increasing the security of the credit card
information.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

30
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll Changes



A Credit Card Audit Log has been created. This log will show the
following:


All credit card transaction requests sent to the payment server



Each time credit card numbers are encrypted or decrypted



Each time a user's print or display credit card preferences is
changed



Each time a credit card key is changed or deleted

Payroll Changes
NOTE
Payroll
enhancements
are not available
for Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Recalculate Deductions in Payroll Data Entry
You now have multiple options for recalculating deductions that are based
on earnings in Payroll Data Entry after changing, adding, or deleting data
entry lines.


Click the new Recalc Deductions button in Payroll Data Entry.



Select Prompt at the new Recalc Deductions in Data Entry field in
Payroll Options. When clicking Accept after changing, adding, or
deleting a line in Payroll Data Entry, a message dialog box will appear
asking if you want to recalculate deductions for the selected employee.



Select Yes at the Recalc Deductions in Data Entry field in Payroll
Options. Deductions will be automatically recalculated when clicking
Accept after changing, adding, or deleting a line in Payroll Data Entry.
You cannot manually overwrite a deduction if you select this option.

Define Deduction Code Options
Five new calculation methods are available in Deduction Code
Maintenance; deductions can now be calculated as follows:


A percentage of another deduction (for employer contributions)



An amount multiplied by the total number of regular and overtime
hours



An amount multiplied by the total hours worked multiplied by the pay
rate multiplier



A percentage of the pay rate multiplied by the total hours worked



An amount multiplied by the pay rate

You can now set up a deduction that is calculated based on selected
earnings types.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

31
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll Changes

Recalculate All Option for Payroll Imports
A Recalc All button has been added to the message dialog box that
appears when importing payroll data through Visual Integrator. Click the
button to recalculate automatic deductions for all records in the Payroll
Data Entry file regardless of whether they exist in the current import. If
you click the button, any previously calculated automatic deduction
amounts will be removed.

Select Preconfigured Payroll Import Jobs
Five preconfigured import jobs are now available to select when importing
payroll data using the Visual Integrator module.


PR_ADP is configured to import delimited files in the ADP Paydata
format.



PR_FORMAT_2 is configured to import ASCII files that use a fixed
field format and include a job number.



PR_KRONOS is configured to import ASCII files in the Kronos
Connect and Time Bank format.



PR_KRONOS_NO_DP is configured to import ASCII files in the
Kronos Connect and Time Bank format.



PR_TIMETRAK is configured to import ASCII files in the Timetrak
version 8.0 format.

To make the jobs available in Import Job Maintenance, use the Job Import
task to import the PayrollDataEntryImports.exp file, which is available in
the MAS90PR folder. For more information, see Import Preconfigured
Payroll Import Jobs in the Help system.

Define Minimum Hours for Benefit Accrual
A new field, Min Hrs/Check, has been added to Benefit Schedule
Maintenance. This field allows you to define a minimum number of hours
that must be worked per check before benefits will accrue.

Identify Business Type
A new field, Kind of Employer, has been added to the Federal eFiling and
Reporting and State eFiling and Reporting tasks in the Payroll module,
and the W2 Electronic Reporting task in the Electronic Reporting module.
This new field allows you to identify your company’s type of business.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

32
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Changes

Purchase Order Changes
Renamed Task
The Auto Generate Orders Selection task on the Main menu has been
renamed Auto Generate from Sales Orders. The task has been
redesigned to facilitate the auto generation process.

View Sales Orders from Purchase Order Entry
In Purchase Order Entry, you can now click the new Sales Order button
on the Lines tab to access and view the sales order for the purchase order
without having to return to the Desktop to open Sales Order Entry.

Set Up Additional Purchase Order/Auto Generate
Options
A new Generate tab has been added to Purchase Order Options. The tab
features additional options for automatically generating purchase orders
from sales orders. You now have the following options:


Combine multiple sales orders for a vendor into one purchase order



Use the sales order number as the purchase order number when
automatically generating purchase orders from sales orders



Increment the purchase order number at the beginning or end when
using the sales order number as the purchase order number



Select whether to base the purchase order header required date on
the system date, purchase order date, sales order ship date, sales
order order date, or to be prompted for a date prior to generating the
purchase order



Select whether to base the purchase order line required date on the
system date, purchase order date, sales order promise date, or to be
prompted for a date prior to generating the purchase order



Print the Auto Generate from Sales Order Listing by customer number
and print the Purchase Order Number Assignment Listing after
generating the purchase orders



Automatically open the Purchase Order Entry window after generating
the orders or print the purchase orders after generating the orders



Enable generating purchase orders from Sales Order Entry and elect
to be prompted to generate purchase orders from Sales Order Entry
for new sales orders

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sales Order Changes



Elect to include the sales order ship-to address, ship via, FOB, confirm
to, e-mail address, line item’s cost of goods sold (COGS) account, and
alias item number for general alias item types on the purchase orders
during generation.

Sales Order Changes
Set Up Additional Options for Job Cost
A new Job Cost tab has been added to Sales Order Options. The tab
features additional options for integrating the Job Cost module with Sales
Order. You now have the following options:


Update invoice costs to job estimates



Post costs for drop-ship lines to the Job Cost module



If the Purchase Order module is set up and integrated with Job Cost,
you can post costs for drop-ship lines in Purchase Order



Have the job status automatically set to complete when the Sales
Journal is updated



Elect to relieve job costs from the work in process account and post
them to the cost of sales account



Have the quantity entered in Sales Order Entry update the quantity on
sales order and quantity on hand values used in the Inventory
Management module



Include the job number and description in the general ledger posting
comment



Define how exploded kit component items and costs are updated to
the Job Transaction Detail file



Define how the system handles a discrepancy between the currently
selected customer number and the job number entered in Sales Order
Entry and Invoice Data Entry



Define which cost of goods sold account and sales revenue account
are used for line items in Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

34
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sales Order Changes

Also, the following fields have been relocated to the Job Cost tab:





Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost
Require Job Number
Allow Jobs to be Created Automatically
Require Cost Code

Calculate Sales Commissions by Line Item
A new task, Line Item Commission Maintenance, has been added to the
Sales Order Setup menu. The task allows you to set up salesperson
commission rates and amounts by combinations of salespersons,
customers, inventory items, and effective dates.

Calculate Item Pricing by Total Quantity
New fields in Sales Order Options allow you to combine the ordered
quantity for multiple sales order and invoice lines when calculating
quantity pricing discounts. You can elect to use the total ordered quantity
for all lines, or you can combine lines by product line or by the item
categories defined in Inventory Management.
You can define which unit of measure to use for totaling the quantity
ordered, and you can specify whether you want the item pricing by
quantity applied automatically, when prompted, or for new entries only.
Additionally, an Item Price button has been added to Sales Order Entry
and Invoice Data Entry, which you can click to apply item pricing by
quantity to the current order or invoice.
The rules that you set up for sales orders and Sales Order invoices will
also be applied to eBusiness Manager shopping cart orders when they
are accepted into Sales Order.

Distribute Lot/Serial Items from Sales Order Entry
Two new fields have been added to Sales Order Options that allow you to
enable lot/serial distribution for sales orders and require that the sales
order lines be fully distributed.


You now have the option to distribute lot and serial numbers when
creating sales orders, similar to S/O Invoice Data Entry, and print the
lot and serial numbers on sales orders and picking sheets. This feature
allows you to specify a lot and serial number and commit the item at
the sales order level so they cannot be used by other tasks. The
lot/serial distribution can then be pulled into Invoice Data Entry when
the sales orders are invoiced.



The new Lot/Serial Search button in Sales Order Entry allows you to
find sales orders that are referencing specific lot/serial numbers. This
feature allows you to easily select the lot/serial number and order for
adjustments.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

35
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Retired Modules

You can now elect to include or exclude lot and serial distribution from all
Open Sales Order reports and the Inventory Stock Status Report.
Additionally, you now have the option to print the lot/serial number and
distribution on sales orders and picking sheets.

Generate Purchase Orders from Sales Orders


You can now click the new Purchase Order button on the Lines tab to
access and view the purchase order for the sales order without having
to return to the Desktop to open Purchase Order Entry. Additionally,
you can now generate a purchase order by clicking the Generate PO
button on the Totals tab.



You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent
users from overriding the bill-to customer number during order entry.

Assign Vendors to Miscellaneous/Special Items


You can now select a vendor number for miscellaneous and special
items so that a purchase order can be automatically generated for
these item types. For regular inventory items, this field defaults to the
items primary vendor but can be changed. For previously entered
sales orders, the Vendor Number field will be blank.



You can now use a security module option in Role Maintenance to
allow users to view the vendor number during order entry.

Retired Modules
The following modules have been retired as of version 4.50:






StarShip (Freight and Parcel)
FRx Reporting
F9
Business Alerts Select
Report Master

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

36
Chapter 6
Workflow Changes in 4.40.0.X
Chapter 6

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.40 release and product updates 4.40.0.1 through 4.40.0.5 that
you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first
followed by module retirements.

Installation Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Upgrading


If you are upgrading from any level prior to 3.71, you must first
upgrade to Level 3.71, and then perform a parallel installation with
version 4.40.



If you have Level 3.x software and version 4.40 software installed on
the same workstation, only install SAP Crystal Reports XI Release 2
for Sage 100 ERP version 4.40 because only this version can read
SAP Crystal Reports in both level 3.x and version 4.x.

Global Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Data File Multi-Segment
NOTE
Contact your
development
partner if you
have segmented
files prior to
version 4.40.
Sage does not
support the
conversion of
those segmented
files.



Sage 100 ERP now supports segmented files. Data files that are
reaching the 2 GB limit will now be segmented. Adding the segmented
feature available in ProvideX will enhance the product’s ability to
handle large data files. For example, the previous need to purge data
from history files when the files reached the 2 GB limit has been
eliminated.
The following is an example of how a segmented file would look in a
company’s data folder:
• IM_ItemTransactionHistory.M4T
• IM_ItemTransaction History.M4T.001
• IM_ItemTransactionHistory.M4T.002



Index and sort files for modules that have not been upgraded to the
Business Framework will not be segmented.



The Rebuild utilities are now enhanced to accommodate segmented
files and a progress meter will appear when running the rebuild
process.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

37
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Global Changes

Activity Log
The Activity Log provides a log of all data removed and the date used.
Previously, the data removed and date used was not recorded for 4.x
level.

Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE)


When you are customizing a lookup in any module other than Job
Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, you
can add fields from linked files to the lookup.



Customizations to lookups in any module other than Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order will not be converted
to your version 4.40 software. You will need to re-create lookup
customizations in the affected modules. This includes customizations
created in the User Lookup Wizard and by clicking Custom in a lookup
window.

Batch Faxing
The fax number must include the area code to process a fax. Previously, if
the fax number was within the local area, the area code was not required.

Character-Based Forms
Forms for all modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are printed using SAP Crystal Reports.
You can no longer print character-based or nongraphical forms for those
modules.

Customized Crystal Forms


Customized Crystal forms in all modules other than Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order will need to be
re-created after upgrading to version 4.40.



Run the Form Comparison report to compare your customized forms
to a default form from the prior version. This report prints the form
name, folder, .rpt name, form code, and any fields (including
user-defined fields) that were added or removed from the standard
forms shipped with version 4.x. Use this report as a reference to
modify the default version 4.40 Crystal forms. This report (SYWFCU) is
available on the product CD and on the Sage Online Web site at:
www.sagesoftwareonline.com

Data Dictionary Changes
The Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, and Work Order file
layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item code
and expanded customer number options.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

38
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Global Changes

Data Entry


To access the Record Count functionality in any module other than Job
Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order,
right-click in a window and select System Info. The old method of
pressing F8 is still available in all other modules.



On the Lines tab of data entry windows in any module other than Job
Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, at a
field, press F2 or click the Lookup button to access the lookup window.
After entering the field, the Lookup button no longer appears; however,
you can still press F2 to access the lookup window.

Desktop


Task folders in your Level 3.x Launcher's My Tasks area will not be
migrated to your version 4.40 Desktop. You will need to re-create your
task folders.



Buttons on your Level 3.x Launcher's Custom toolbar will not be
migrated to your version 4.40 Desktop's Custom toolbar. You will need
to re-create your buttons on the Custom toolbar.

Expanded Customer Numbers
Reports and forms have changed to accommodate the expanded
customer number field.

Expanded Item Codes
Reports and forms have changed to accommodate the expanded item
code field.

Printing


All reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order now use SAP Crystal
Reports. Because of this, those modules no longer use the settings
established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.



For reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, the process for
exporting or printing a report to a file has changed. In those modules,
the Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window
has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer
field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information
on how to export or print reports to a file in these modules, see Export
or Print to a File in the Help system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

39
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes



For reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order the process for
deferring the printing of a report has changed. In those modules, the
Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from
the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer
Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a
report in these modules, see Defer a Report in the Help system.



Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the
following locations:


Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order
deferred files are located at ..HomeTextout.



All other module files are located at ..HomeDeferred.

Reports and Forms


WARNING
Reports on the
Custom Reports
menus will not be
migrated from
your Level 3.x to
version 4.40
software.

In modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning,
Payroll, and Work Order, report setting options now appear on the
header area of the applicable report window. You can also define and
save customized report settings. For more information, see Create a
Report Setting in the Help system.



The organization of reports on the Custom Reports menus will not be
migrated from your Level 3.x software to version 4.40. Before
upgrading, use the SUMNUA utility in your Level 3.x software to print
copies of the existing Custom Reports menus' organization to facilitate
adding your reports to the Custom Reports menus in your version 4.40
software. To access the SUMNUA utility in your Level 3.x software,
select File menu > Run. In the Run Program window, type SUMNUA.

Library Master Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Changed Tasks
The Automatic Update process is now performed using Task Scheduler
for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning,
Payroll, and Work Order.

Role Maintenance
Override passwords previously maintained in Bill of Materials, Inventory
Management, and Purchase Order Options are now handled as security
events in Role Maintenance.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

40
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes

Accounts Payable Changes
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.2
ACH Electronic Payment Processing


In Accounts Payable Options, the following fields have been renamed:


The Check Register in Detail check box has been renamed Check
and Electronic Payment Register in Detail.



The Check Comments Field has been renamed Check/Electronic
Payment Comments.



The Print G/L Distribution on Check Register check box has been
renamed Print G/L Distribution on Check/Electronic Payment
Registers.



The Include Voided Checks and Include Wire Transfers fields have
been removed from the Accounts Payable Check History Report
window. They have been replaced with a Payment Types to Print
section, which includes a Voided Checks check box and a Wire
Transfers check box.



The Include Wire Transfers field has been removed from the Payment
History Report window. It has been replaced with a Payment Types to
Print section, which includes a Wire Transfers check box.

Renamed Tasks


The Check Printing Menu has been renamed Check Printing and
Electronic Payment to reflect the ability to pay vendors electronically.



Check Maintenance has been renamed Check and Electronic
Payment Maintenance.



Check Printing has been renamed Check Printing and Electronic
Payment.



Check Register has been renamed Check and Electronic Payment
Register. If you are processing electronic payments, you will be
prompted to print the Check Register and then the Electronic Payment
Register.

Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1
Renamed Tasks


Manual Check Entry has been renamed Manual Check and Payment
Entry to reflect the added ability to record and reverse wire transfers.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

41
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes



The Manual Check Register task has been renamed Manual Check
and Payment Register.

Change in Version 4.40
Renamed Task
The Detail Receipt History task in Vendor Maintenance has been
renamed Vendor Receipt History.

Accounts Receivable Changes
Change in Version 4.40
Renamed Task
The Detail Sales History task in Customer Maintenance has been
renamed Customer Sales History.

Bank Reconciliation Changes
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.3
Registers and Updates
You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users
from updating the registers.

Renamed Task
The Bank Reconciliation Register task on the Main menu has been
renamed to Bank Reconciliation Report.

Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2
Enter Checks, Deposits, and Adjustments On-the-Fly
In Reconcile Bank, you can now enter checks, deposits, and adjustments
on the fly. Previously, you had to exit Reconcile Bank and enter additional
checks, deposits, or adjustments in Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

42
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Bar Code Changes

Bar Code Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Bar Code Options
The Graphical Forms field has been removed as the Bar Code module
now uses SAP Crystal Reports to print forms and reports.

Unattended Bar Code Transaction Import
ODB files are no longer imported using the Unattended Bar Code
Transaction Import task. ODB files must now be imported using Import Bill
of Materials Transactions, Import Inventory Transactions, Import
Purchase Order Transactions, and Import Sales Order Transactions.

Renamed Tasks


The Period End Processing task has been renamed Purge Bar Code
History.



The Bar Code P/O Receiver Printing task has been renamed Purchase
Order Printing.

Bill of Materials Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Global Changes


You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import bill of materials
data.



You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry
screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the
entry.



You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously,
only the first 24 characters were displayed.

Bill of Materials Options


The option to Allow Entry of Negative Quantities no longer applies to
Option Interaction Maintenance.



If the Allow Kit Bills and/or the Allow Phantom Bills check boxes are
cleared, a message dialog box will now appear in Bill of Materials
Options. Previously, the message dialog box displayed in Bill of
Materials Maintenance.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

43
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Bill of Materials Changes



You can now enter a unique next automatic disassembly number.
Previously, Production Entry and Disassembly Entry shared the same
option.

Data Entry
In all data entry windows, the Item Inquiry window has been replaced with
the Item Quantity Inquiry window.

Inquiry Changes


The Bill of Materials Inquiry and Bill of Materials Where-Used Inquiry
windows have been re-designed with new fields and drill downs.



The Options button in Bill of Materials Inquiry and Bill of Materials
Where-Used Inquiry has been replaced with radio buttons for the
different selections to inquire on. Additionally, a tree view now displays
when the Indented view is selected.

Printing


Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this,
the Bill of Materials module no longer uses the settings established in
Library Master Report Format Maintenance.



The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed.
The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup
window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from
the Printer field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more
information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or
Print to a File in the Help system.



The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The
Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from
the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer
Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a
report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.



The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
"Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box, so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.



Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the
..HomeDeferred folder.



The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to
remain in portrait format.

Reports and Forms
Report setting options now appear on the header area of the applicable
report window. You can also define and save customized report settings.
For more information, see Create a Report Setting in the Help system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

44
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Business Insights Changes

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


All the inquiry windows on the Main menu have been moved to the
Inquiries menu.



The Replace/Delete Component Entry task on the Change Control
menu has been renamed Replace and Delete Component Entry.



The Replace/Delete Component Register has been renamed Replace
and Delete Component Register.



The Miscellaneous Charge Maintenance task on the Setup menu has
been renamed Miscellaneous Item Maintenance. This task is also
available from the Common Information Main menu.

Business Insights Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Business Insights Reporter
After upgrading to version 4.40, you will need to re-create Business
Insights Reporter reports used in Bill of Materials, Inventory Management,
and Purchase Order.
NOTE
The Business
Insights Reporter
Definition Listing
prints fields,
sorts, and filters
for the report you
need to re-create.



For custom reports previously created using version 4.30 or prior data
from the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order
modules, access Business Insights Reporter and select a report in the
Business Insights Reporter Selection window. You are prompted to
print the Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing and then delete
the report. Repeat this process for each custom report previously
created for the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase
Order modules.

Common Information Changes
Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2
Bank Code Maintenance
In Role Maintenance, a new module option for Common Information has
been created that controls which users can change the current balance
for each bank defined in Bank Code Maintenance. Previously, there was
no security for this function so all users could change the current balance.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

45
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Common Information Changes

Changes in Version 4.40
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance has been added to the Common
Information Main menu. This task remains on the Bill of Materials Setup
menu and Purchase Order Setup menu.

Common Information Options


The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Inventory
Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup
menu and in the Purchase Order Options window on the Purchase
Order Setup menu, have been moved to the Common Information
Options window on the Common Information Setup menu.



The Years to Retain Item History field, previously in the Inventory
Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup
menu, has been moved to the Common Information Options window
on the Common Information Setup menu. Additionally, a minimum of
two years is now required to retain history.



NOTE
These options do
not apply in
Accounts
Receivable
Invoice Data
Entry and
Repetitive Invoice
Entry.

If the Inventory Management module is not set up for a company, the
Common Information period history will be accumulated based on the
General Ledger fiscal year setup. If the Inventory Management module
is set up, the history will be accumulated based on the selection made
at the Base Inventory Periods On field in Inventory Management
Options.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


The Unit of Measure Conversion Maintenance task, previously on the
Inventory Management Setup menu, has been moved to the Common
Information Setup menu.



The Purge Miscellaneous Item History has been renamed Purge Item
History.



Purge Obsolete Extended Descriptions, previously on the Library
Master Utilities menu, has been moved to the Common Information
Utilities menu.



Memo Manager Maintenance, previously on the Library Master Setup
menu, has been moved to the Common Information Main menu. This
task remains on the Purchase Order Setup menu and Inventory
Management Setup menu.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

46
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Customizer Changes

Customizer Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Global Changes


Customized libraries for the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management,
and Purchase Order modules will not be migrated and must be
re-created after the migration process.



Data entry user-defined fields (UDFs) must be re-created in
User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance after upgrading to
version 4.40. After re-creating UDFs, you must map the UDFs to their
respective history files. For more information, see Map User-Defined
Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.



For Purchase Order Receipt of Goods, Receipt of Invoice, and Return
of Goods, the new Purchase Order Invoice UDF migrated or converted
to 4.40 from 4.20 or 4.30 is no longer needed. For UDFs that existed in
the Purchase Order Invoice UDF file, these records will need to be
imported into an AP Invoice History Header UDF. The Purchase Order
Invoice UDFs are not automatically merged into the AP Invoice History
Header UDF upon upgrading to 4.40.



When upgrading from a previous version of 4.x, the following list of
UDFs are updated to specific tables:


The Bill of Materials Header UDFs are now updated to the new BM
Bill Header table.



The Bill of Materials Lines UDFs are now updated to the new BM Bill
Detail table.



The Inventory Management Warehouse Detail UDFs are updated to
the new IM Item Warehouse table.



The Purchase Order Receipt History UDFs are now updated to the
new PO Receipt History Header table.



The Purchase Order Receipt/Return Lines UDFs are now updated
to the new PO Receipt History Detail table.



The Purchase Order UDFs are now updated to the new PO
Purchase Order Header table.



The Purchase Order Lines UDFS are now updated to the new PO
Purchase Order Detail table.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

47
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
eBusiness Manager Changes

eBusiness Manager Changes
NOTE
The eBusiness
Manager module
is not available
for Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Changes in Version 4.40
Sage Web Engine


You must uninstall the Sage Web Engine, and then re-install it after
upgrading to version 4.40.



If you have customized templates in the IW folder, back them up in
another location before uninstalling the Sage Web Engine. After
uninstalling, you must merge your customized templates with the
Standard templates as some have changed for corrections or
enhancements.



Enabling item code expansion (from 15 to 30 characters) can cause
layout changes in your HTML templates when rendering in a browser.
You should verify if your customized templates are affected.

General Ledger Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Fiscal Year Maintenance


In Fiscal Year Maintenance, if you change an existing period-end date
and/or year, the Item History by Period information is now included as
part of the recalculation. Previously, the system recalculated only the
General Ledger Posting History by Period and Sales Order Recap
information.



The functionality of the Recalculate button has been changed to
recalculate only the Sales Order Recap information. Previously,
clicking this button recalculated the General Ledger summary
information. You can now use the Recalculate Account Balances utility
on the Utilities menu to recalculate the General Ledger information.

Inventory Management Changes
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.5
Inactive Items
An Inactive Item check box has been added to the Item Maintenance,
Product Line Maintenance, and Apply Product Line Information windows.
Internet enabled items cannot be inactive. If the Inactive Item check box is
selected for an item, its Internet Enabled check box will automatically be
cleared and disabled.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

48
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Management Changes

Changes in Version 4.40
Global Changes


If the Inventory Management module is not set up for a company, the
Common Information period history will be accumulated based on the
General Ledger fiscal year setup. If the Inventory Management module
is set up, the history will be accumulated based on the selection made
at the Base Inventory Periods On field in Inventory Management
Options.



You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry
screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the
entry.



You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously,
only the first 24 characters were displayed.



You can now print receipt labels after printing or previewing the
Transaction Register. Previously, you could only print the receipt labels
before the update process.



You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import inventory data.

Inventory Management Options


The ability to sort physical count by bin location, previously in the
Inventory Management Options window on the Setup menu has been
moved to the Physical Count Worksheet and Physical Count Entry
tasks on the Physical Count menu. You can now select to print by bin
location.



The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Inventory
Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup
menu has been moved to the Common Information Options window on
the Common Information Setup menu.



The Retain Transaction History check box has been removed from the
Inventory Management Options window. You can now use the Purge
Item History utility on the Inventory Management or Common
Information Utilities menu to purge transaction history. Additionally, at
least 2 years retention is required.



The ability to add a not-on-file warehouse has been removed.
Validation occurs now when the warehouse code is entered.



The next automatic entry numbers options have been moved to the
new Entry tab. In addition, you can now enter alphanumeric and
special characters.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

49
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Management Changes

Product Line Maintenance
The Allow Back Orders check box must first be selected to enable the
Allow Returns check box. Selecting the Allow Returns check box will now
be the entry default selection for items in the Item Maintenance window
and can be applied to existing inventory items by clicking Apply.
Previously, the Allow Back Orders and Allow Returns check boxes were
both enabled, and an inventory item created with this product line then
inherited these settings.

Transaction Entry


You can now use the batch entry feature to perform multiple entry
sessions simultaneously.



You can now clear a previous distribution to enter a new distribution in
the Distribution Entry window when adjusting an item. Previously, you
had to enter a 0 (zero) at the Distribute field to clear the FIFO/LIFO/
Lot/Serial Number and Receipt No. fields.

Item Maintenance


Some hot keys have been changed to provide convenient shortcuts to
tasks that are otherwise accessed through menu navigation. For a list
of the updated hot keys, see Using Hot Keys in Item Maintenance in
the Help system.



The Standard Cost field can no longer be changed for standard cost
items with activity. If activity exists, this field can only be viewed.
Instead, use the new Standard Cost Adjustment Entry task to adjust
the standard cost.



You can now view the information on a grid by quantity, sales, or
receipts by selecting the Quantities, Sales, or Receipts option on the
new History tab. Previously, you had to click the History button on the
Main tab to view item quantity, sales, or receipt information.



Quantity information previously in the Quantity on Hand and Reorder
windows, is now available on the Quantity tab. Reorder information
can be accessed by clicking the Reorder button on the Quantity tab
and on the More button.



Buttons on the Main tab have been moved to the More button.

Physical Count Changes


You can now print the Physical Count Worksheet by bin location and
quantity on hand. Previously, the worksheet could only be printed by
item code and item description, and the quantity on hand was not
available to print.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

50
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Management Changes



The Physical Count Entry task now checks the Sales Order, Return
Merchandise Authorization, Bill of Materials, Purchase Order, and
Work Order modules and displays a warning if unprocessed inventory
transaction entries exist when trying to freeze the items. Previously, it
only checked Inventory Management.

Costing Changes


If an average cost item has negative quantity on hand, when items are
received, the cost is adjusted only for the quantity received. Previously,
the cost was adjusted for the entire negative quantity.



The Inventory Detail Transaction Report, Inventory Trial Balance
Report, and Inventory Valuation Report by Period now print the
historical standard cost by default and a selection to print the current or
historical cost is now available in the report windows. Previously, only
the current standard cost was provided.



The Automatic Cost and Price Change task is no longer used to
change the standard cost for standard cost items. You must use
Standard Cost Adjustment Entry on the Inventory Management Utilities
menu to change the standard cost for standard cost items.

Utilities Menu
A new Utilities menu has been added to the Inventory Management
module. The tasks available in this menu are:












Delete and Change Items
Purge Item History
Remove Zero Quantity Costing Tiers
Recalculate Item History
Item Valuation Change Selection
Item Valuation Change Maintenance
Item Valuation Change Register/Update
Automatic Cost and Price Change
Standard Cost Adjustment Selection
Standard Cost Adjustment Entry
Stand Cost Adjustment Register/Update

Period End Processing
Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End
Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.
Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window
have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Only Remove Detail History option has been replaced with the
Purge Item History task on the Utilities menu.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

51
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Management Changes



The Only Remove Costing Tiers with Zero Quantities option has been
replaced with the Remove Zero Quantity Costing Tiers task on the
Utilities menu.



The Only Remove Transaction Detail option has been removed.

Printing


You can now print receipt labels after printing or previewing the
Transaction Register. Previously, you could only print receipt labels
before the update process.



The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
message dialog box stating there is no data in the range to print so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.



Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this,
the Inventory Management module no longer uses the settings
established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.



The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed.
The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup
window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from
the Printer field, and it uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more
information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or
Print to a File in the Help system.



The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The
Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from
the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer
Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a
report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.



Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the
..HomeDeferred folder.



The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to
remain in portrait format.

Reports and Forms


The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
"Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.



The Inventory Valuation Report by Period can now print items with
zero balances and the unit cost for standard cost items can be viewed
by current or historical transactions.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


The Inventory Maintenance and Inventory Inquiry tasks on the Main
menu have been renamed Item Maintenance and Item Inquiry.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

52
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Job Cost Changes



The Transaction Journal on the Main menu has been renamed
Transaction Register.



The Automatic Cost/Price Change task has been moved to the Utilities
menu and renamed Automatic Cost and Price Change.



The Sales Kit Listing on the Kits menu has been renamed Sales Kit
Report.



The Inventory Memo Printing report on the Reports menu has been
renamed Item Memo Printing.



The Item Masterfile Audit Report on the Reports menu has been
renamed Item Audit Report.



The U/M Conversion Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been
renamed Unit of Measure Conversion Maintenance and moved to the
Common Information Setup menu.



The Buyer/Planner Code Maintenance task on the Setup menu has
been renamed Buyer and Planner Code Maintenance.



The Bar Code Printer Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been
moved to the Work Order Setup menu.



The Item Delete/Renumber/Merge option in the Inventory
Management Utilities window on the Setup menu has been moved to
the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and Change Items.



The Item Valuation Change Selection, Item Valuation Change
Maintenance, and Item Valuation Change Register options in the
Inventory Management Utilities task on the Setup menu have been
moved to the Utilities menu.



The name of the hidden utility, IMZBL1, has been changed to
IM_BalanceQtyOnHand_UI.

Job Cost Changes
NOTE
The Job Cost
module is not
available for
Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Changes in Version 4.40
Job Cost Options
The Timberline Estimating and Directory for Estimating Database fields in
the Job Cost Options window have been removed due to the retirement of
Timberline Link.

Data Dictionary Changes
The file layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item
code and expanded customer number options.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

53
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll Changes

Payroll Changes
NOTE
The Payroll
module is not
available for
Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Change in Product Update 4.40.0.5
Quarterly 941 Printing
In the Quarterly 941 Printing window, the Tax Due on Unreported Tips
field has been added.

Change in Version 4.40
Quarterly 941 Printing
In the Quarterly 941 Printing window, the Current Tax Withholding, Prior
Quarter Social Sec/Medicare, Additions to Federal Tax, and Additions to
Social Sec/Medicare fields have been removed. The COBRA Premium
Assist. Payments and Individuals Provided COBRA Assist. fields have
been added.

Purchase Order Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Global Changes


You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import purchase order
data.



You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry
screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the
entry.



You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously,
only the first 24 characters were displayed.



The Tabs button has been removed from data entry tasks and the
settings are now available as part of the data entry grid.



Batch processing is now handled through system Batch Manager
programs. Previously, there was one Batch Processing option that
applied to the data entry tasks. Receipt of Goods/Invoice Entry and
Return Of Goods/Material Requisition Issue Entry tasks now have their
own batch options.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

54
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Changes



Previously, historical data was stored by the period to date (PTD), year
to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Purchase Order purchases
and receipt history are now stored by period by year. The conversion
for purchases and receipts history is now performed as follows:
• The PTD record is converted to the current period.
• The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period
(for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD
amount should be in May).
• The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the
prior year.



The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the
General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year.

Purchase Order Options


The ability to create passwords or allow overrides to data entry
security options has been removed from Purchase Order Options and
replaced with security event options in Role Maintenance on the
Library Master Main menu.



The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Purchase
Order Options window on the Purchase Order Setup menu, have been
moved to the Common Information Options window on the Common
Information Setup menu.



The ability to inquire on a memo from an entry task has been replaced
with the Memo Manager Maintenance task on the Common
Information Main menu.



Entry options have been moved to the Entry tab, line entry options
have been moved to the Line Entry tab, printing options have been
moved to the Printing tab, and history options have been moved to the
History tab.



You can now display all drop-ship lines from a sales order, regardless
of the assigned purchase order vendor. Previously, when a drop-ship
purchase order was entered, the drop-ship lines on the sales order
would display if the vendor matched one of the vendors assigned to
the item.



You can now remove purchase history from the Purchase Order file by
selecting the Purge Purchases History Utility task on the Purchase
Order Utilities menu. Previously, the purchase history was removed
during period-end processing.



You can now retain comment lines in receipt history. Previously, the
Accounts Payable module controlled comments for receipt history.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

55
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Changes



You can now select a format to use for posting comments to General
Ledger.



Additional fields have been added to print the Back Order Fill Report.

Purchases History


Previously, purchase history was saved by period and month. With
version 4.40 and higher, purchase history is now continuously saved
by receipt date and posting date.



You must now retain at least two years of purchase history at the Years
to Retain Purchase History field in the Purchase Order Options
window, with the option to retain up to 99 years.

Data Entry


The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity
Inquiry window in Purchase Order Entry, Receipt of Goods Entry, and
Receipt of Invoice Entry.



The Tabs button has been removed and a Defaults button added to all
data entry windows.



You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent
users from adding inventory items on the fly. Previously, the Allow
On-the-Fly Additions of Inventory Items field was available in Purchase
Order Options.

Utilities Menu
A new Utilities menu has been added to the Purchase Order module. The
tasks available in this menu are:







Purge Completed Purchase Orders
Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders
Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap
Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders
Purge Purchase Order Receipt History
Purge Purchases History

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

56
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Changes

Period End Processing
Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End
Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.
Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window
have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Purge Completed Purchase Orders option has been replaced with
the Purge Completed Purchase Orders task.



The Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders option has been
replaced with the Purge Expired and Master Repeating Order task.



The Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap option has been
replaced with the Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap task.



The Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders option has been replaced with
the Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders task. Additionally, records dated
on or before the purge date entered has been removed.



The Purge Purchase Order Receipt History option has been replaced
with the Purge Purchase Order Receipt History task.



The Purge Purchases History utility has been added to the Utilities
menu to remove purchase history. Previously, the purchase history
was removed during period-end processing.

Printing


Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this,
the Purchase Order module no longer uses the settings established in
Library Master Report Format Maintenance.



The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
message dialog box stating there is no data in the range to print so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.



The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed.
The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup
window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from
the Printer field and it uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more
information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or
Print to a File in the Help system.



The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The
Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from
the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer
Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a
report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.



Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the
..HomeDeferred folder.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

57
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Purchase Order Changes



The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to
remain in portrait format.

Registers and Updates
The Purchase Order Variance Register now prints after the register and
before the update. Previously, this register printed after the update.

Reports and Forms


In the Back Order Fill Report, you can now print only the items that
have a back ordered quantity on the sales order if the received
quantity is not equal to zero. Previously, the report printed all items on
the purchase order that had a back ordered quantity on the sales
order.



Report setting options now appear on the header area of the
applicable report window. You can also define and save customized
report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in
the Help system.



The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
"Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


The Purge Completed Purchase Orders, Purge Expired
Master/Repeating Orders, Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap,
and Purge Obsolete Purchase Order utilities have been moved from
the Period End Processing window to the Utilities menu.



The Purge Purchase Order Receipt History and Purge Purchases
History utilities have been added to the Utilities menu.



The Open PO by Item Report has been renamed Open Orders by Item
Report.



The Open PO by Job Report has been renamed Open Orders by Job
Report.



The Receipt History Report has been renamed Purchase Order
Receipt History Report.



The Open PO by Work Order Report has been renamed Open Orders
by Work Order Report.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

58
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Return Merchandise Authorization Changes



The Automatic Reorder Selection option has been renamed Auto
Reorder Selection.



The Ship to Address Maintenance task has been renamed Ship-To
Address Maintenance.



The Miscellaneous Charge Maintenance task has been renamed
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance.

Return Merchandise Authorization Changes
Change in Version 4.40
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks
The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity Inquiry
window in RMA Entry and RMA Receipts Entry.

Sales Order Changes
Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1
Checking for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers


The Check for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers check box in the
Sales Order Options window has been replaced with the Files to
Check for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers section.



You can now select which Sales Order and Accounts Receivable
History and Entry files are searched when entering sales orders and
invoices.



In Role Maintenance you now have a module option to prevent the use
of duplicate customer purchase order numbers.

Data Entry
When creating a sales order from a master or repeating order or quote,
the payment type on the sales order will be defaulted from the default
payment type in Customer Maintenance. Previously it would default from
the payment type in the master or repeating order or quote.

Expanded Quick Print Options
The Quick Print button in Sales Order Entry has been replaced with the
Print Order button, and the Print Pick button has been added. Based on
selections in Sales Order Options, you can now quick print picking sheets
in Sales Order Entry, and you can receive a prompt to quick print picking
sheets and shipping labels immediately after quick printing sales orders.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

59
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sales Order Changes

Changes for Picking Sheet Printing


A picking sheet is no longer printed if the source sales order is in use
in Sales Order Entry during the picking sheet selection process.



If the Print Pick Sheets check box for a sales order is not cleared after
the picking sheet is printed because the order is in use by another user
during the printing process, the message dialog box that appears now
lists the affected orders. Also, you can now turn off this message in
Sales Order Options; the order information will then be written to the
Activity Log.

Changes in Version 4.40
Sales History Reports
The Customer Sales History Report now prints by invoice date or posting
date depending on whether you base inventory periods by physical
periods or calendar months. Previously, this report was printed by period
or month. This same report also printed sales history by item or product
line. Now you can print information using three new reports.




Customer Sales History by Item
Customer Sales History by Product Line
Customer Sales History

Security Option for Adding Inventory Items on the Fly
You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users
from adding inventory items on the fly. Previously, the Allow On-the-Fly
Additions of Inventory Items field was available in Sales Order Options.

Data Entry


In the Sales Order Entry window, the user login ID is now displayed if
security is set up. Previously, the user code displayed.



The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity
Inquiry window in Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry.

Renamed Tasks


The Monthly Recap by Division has been renamed Sales Recap by
Division.



The Monthly Recap by Product Line has been renamed Sales Recap
by Product Line.



The Monthly Recap by Warehouse has been renamed Sales Recap by
Warehouse.



The Monthly Recap by Warehouse by Product Line has been renamed
Sales Recap by Warehouse by Product Line.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

60
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Integrator Changes

Visual Integrator Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Data Dictionaries
Before you use the Visual Integrator module, select Visual Integrator Main
menu > Export Job Maintenance or Import Job Maintenance after
installing version 4.40. This initiates the necessary update of the Data
Dictionaries so that you can successfully create Visual Integrator jobs.

Data Dictionary Listing
File information for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order is no longer included on the Data
Dictionary Listing. To obtain file information for these modules, on the
Desktop, access the Resources page and click the File Layouts and
Program Information link. You must re-create Visual Integrator jobs for
these modules.

Import Job Maintenance


When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job
Maintenance, the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In
the V/I Import Job Selection window, you can enter a new job name or
select an existing job. For new jobs, you must select the table
(previously referred to as File Name) for which the import will be
prepared. After a table is selected, the Import Job Maintenance
window appears.
If a table for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, or Work Order is selected in the V/I Import Job
Selection window, only the tables for those modules are available for
selection at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in
the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order module is
selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, files from only these
modules are available at the File Name field in the Import Job
Maintenance window.



The Validation tab is no longer available because validation is done by
the business object. When you create a job for the Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order modules,
the Validation tab is available.



In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a job for
modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning,
Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order, you cannot test or execute the
import job until your system administrator gives you the rights to
execute the job in Role Maintenance. Previously, system security did
not prevent you from immediately executing jobs for these modules.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

61
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Work Order Changes



You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import inventory, bill of
materials, and purchase order data.



All data entry business objects now allow an existing line item in the
Detail file to be modified. The Line Key field is now displayed in red
and its value must be provided to edit an existing detail line. If the
value provided is blank or invalid, a new detail line will be added from
the import record.



The ability to import lot and serial distribution records is now included
in the related header import. In the Available Fields section of the Data
tab, tier distribution fields are now available and are preceded by the
letters LL. Previously, importing lot and distribution records was
available only in Sales Order Invoice Data Entry and required a tier
distribution record type using a pre-defined tier distribution import
layout.



In the Import Job Maintenance window, in the Available Selections
section of the Record tab, the Change Next On option has been
removed.
When evaluating the Header information in the Source file and a
change is found, the next record is automatically created. It is
important to have consistent Header information when importing
multiple line and distribution records. For example, if the key value
(sales order number) in the Source file is the same for three rows, and
one field in each row has a different value, the subsequent row will
replace the previous row imported with the same key.



The Job Import Log now contains the record type to distinguish
between Header, Line, and Distribution records. Previously, only the
Header and Line records displayed. The Distribution records were
appended to the Line records.

Work Order Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks
NOTE
The Work Order
module is not
available for
Sage 100
Premium ERP.

The Bar Code Printer Maintenance task, previously on the Inventory
Management Setup menu, has been moved to the Work Order Setup
menu.

File Layout
The file layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item
code and expanded customer number options.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

62
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Report Master Changes

Report Master Changes
Changes in Version 4.40
Reports


Reports for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are now created using Business
Insights Reporter. Report Master reports can no longer be generated
for these modules.



Sage recommends using Business Insights Reporter to create custom
reports for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order.



Sage recognizes that you may have expended considerable time and
effort creating custom reports for Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order in Report Master. As a result,
although Report Master has been removed, it can still be accessed by
using a hidden utility. To access Report Master, select File > Run and
type *unhiderm in the Run Program window.

Retired Modules
The following modules were retired as of version 4.40:





Timberline
ACT! Link
SageCRM version 6.1 (This does not apply to Extended Enterprise
Suite customers)
Crystal Web Reports

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

63
Chapter 7
Workflow Changes in 4.30
Chapter 7

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.30 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global
changes are listed first followed by module retirements.

Installation Changes
The option for installing Microsoft Internet Explorer is removed because
the version of Internet Explorer required is now available with the
supported versions of Windows.

Global Changes
Reports and Forms


The information previously on the Main and Select tabs in report
windows is now conveniently on one screen.



The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the
"Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box, so you
can resolve the issue without losing your settings.

Selection Grids
In the selection grids, you can now enter the Value fields before selecting
an operand.

Library Master Changes
Role Maintenance


When defining a role in Role Maintenance to provide users with
access to Business Insights Reporter, select the Business Insights
Reporter check box under Library Master > Setup Options. This check
box was previously located under the Business Insights folder in Role
Maintenance.



You can now set up access to the Business Insights Dashboard for
each user using the Dashboard Maintenance Wizard. The module
options for the Business Insights Dashboard are removed from Role
Maintenance.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

64
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

Accounts Receivable Changes
Customer Statements
You must now set up the Paperless Office module to e-mail statements to
customers. Previously, to e-mail customer statements, you had to select
the E-mail Statements check box in Customer Maintenance and then
select the appropriate option at the Produce Statements For field in the
Statement Printing window. For more information, see Set Up Paperless
Office in the Help system.

Business Insights Changes
Business Insights Dashboard


To take advantage of the Business Insights Dashboard's upgraded
architecture, you must set up your Dashboard pages again. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.



Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is required to view the Dashboard
pages.



You can now set up access to the Business Insights Dashboard for
each user using the Dashboard Maintenance Wizard. The module
options for the Business Insights Dashboard are removed from Role
Maintenance.



In the Top Customer view, the Year to Date field now excludes
future-dated transactions that are in the same year. The new Business
Insights Dashboard displays the information as of the date entered. If a
date is not entered, the information is displayed as of the period-end
date.

Business Insights Reporter


You must activate the Business Insights module to use Business
Insights Reporter.



When defining a role in Role Maintenance to provide users with
access to Business Insights Reporter, select the Business Insights
Reporter check box under Library Master > Setup Options. This check
box was previously located under the Business Insights folder in Role
Maintenance.

Common Information Changes
Bank Code Maintenance
The Bank ID Number field in the Bank Code Maintenance window has
been renamed Bank Account Number.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

65
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Payroll Changes

Payroll Changes
Direct Deposits


In the Direct Deposit Interface Setup window, the account numbers
can now only be viewed. The account numbers can be changed using
Bank Code Maintenance.



The Space Rather Than Dash in the Word 'Pre-Note' check box is now
available in the Direct Deposit Interface Setup window. Previously, this
check box was in the Extended Solution's PR-1017 Setup Options
window.



During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID (bank
account) number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account
number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account
number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank
Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct
Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered
in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in
the conversion log.

Visual Integrator Changes
Job Import
You no longer need to run the VIWUD1 utility to update the data fields
after you use Job Import to import Level 3.x jobs into Visual Integrator.
This utility is now run automatically.

Report Master Changes
For printing reports from subsidiary modules that contain a general ledger
account number greater than 20 characters, you will need to manually
adjust the print position for the data fields following the account. This is
because the maximum mask length in Report Master is 20 characters and
that determines how much space Report Master defaults on the report.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

66
Chapter 8
Workflow Changes in 4.20
Chapter 8

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.20 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global
changes are listed first followed by module retirements.

Global Changes
Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE)
The ALE Conversion Utility has been renamed Lookup Conversion.

Desktop


The Business Desktop has been renamed Sage 100 ERP Desktop.



The Modules tab has been renamed Tasks.



File layout and program information previously included in the
Technical Reference and Support Guide is now accessible from the
File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page.



Tutorials have been moved to the new Tutorials page.

Help System and Online Manuals


On the Contents tab of the Help system, the Module Help book
contains links to individual Help systems for each module in
Sage 100 ERP. Under each module’s main book, Help topics are
further categorized into books of topics regarding procedures,
information about printing forms and reports, and glossary terms. You
can select any grouping of Help topics to print at one time, as well as
print individual Help topics. For more information, see Print a Book of
Help Topics in the Help system.



Also available on the Contents tab of the Help system is the Module
PDFs book which contains links to individual PDFs for each module in
Sage 100 ERP. These PDFs have been specially constructed to allow
you to easily print the overview information for each task in a module.
The PDFs are organized according to the menu structure of the
module. For more information, see Print a Module PDF in the Help
system.

Inquiries
The Accounts Receivable Inquiry, RMA Inquiry, and Sales Order Inquiry
tasks are available.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

67
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes

Printing
The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain
in portrait format.

Printing to a Dot Matrix Printer
You can print to a dot matrix printer as long as the printer has a
corresponding Windows printer driver and supports draft mode font to
enable high-speed printing.
A dot matrix form code is available for printing several forms. For more
information, see Customize Dot Matrix Form Template in the Help system.

Report Master
Report Master is no longer available for modules using the Business
Framework architecture.

Library Master Changes
Batch Faxing
You can set up batch faxing for the following forms using Report Manager:









Statement Printing
Accounts Receivable Invoice Printing
Customer RMA Printing
RMA Receiver Printing
Sales Order Printing
Picking Sheet Printing
Sales Order Invoice Printing
Purchase Order Printing

Previously, batch faxing for these forms was set up in the Fax Form
Definition window. To set up batch fax options for these forms, select
Library Master Setup menu > Report Manager. In the Report Manager
window, select a form and click the Maintain button. In the Maintain
window, click the Maintain Fax Options button.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

68
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes

Role Maintenance


Roles set up to establish access to tasks, security events, and module
options for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order need to be verified after upgrading
to version 4.40. New tasks, security events, and module options added
for those modules are not selected for current roles after upgrading.



If you are upgrading from version 4.10, roles need to be verified for the
Accounts Payable module and for the Accounts Receivable Inquiry,
RMA Inquiry, and Sales Order Inquiry tasks. New tasks, security
events, and module options added for this module are not selected for
current roles after upgrading.



Override passwords previously maintained in Sales Order Options are
now handled as security events in Role Maintenance.



ODBC Security will not be migrated when upgrading to version 4.20
and needs to be re-created.

Renamed Task
The FAS Link module has been renamed Fixed Assets.

Reports


The .rpt files for reports on the Custom Reports menu now have a new
folder structure. To use your existing customized report files with
version 4.00 or higher, you must add the .rpt files to the Custom
Reports menu using the Menu wizard in Report Manager. The .rpt file
names must end with "custom.rpt" to be added using the Menu
Wizard. To access the Menu Wizard, select Library Master Setup
menu > Report Manager. In the Report Manager window, click Add
Report to Menu.



The new folder structure for reports uses a combination of company
code, task name, and form code or report setting name determined by
the selections in the Add New Format window. Examples of the new
folder structure are as follows:


For a specific company code, task name, and form code or report
setting name:
(...MAS90MAS_ABCReportsAR_InvoicePrintingINVOICESSTD
*.rpt)



For a specific company code and task name and all form code or
report setting names:
(...MAS90MAS_ABCReportsAR_InvoicePrinting*.rpt)

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

69
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes



For all companies and specific task name and form code or report
setting names:
(...MAS90MAS_SYSTEMReportsAR_InvoicePrinting
INVOICESSTD*.rpt)



For all companies, specific task name, and all form code or report
setting names:
(...MAS90MAS_SYSTEMReportsAR_InvoicePrinting*.rpt)

URL Maintenance
You can use the URL Maintenance task to store URL information for the
Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099s module. Two URL codes and
descriptions were created for the Social Security Administration (SSA)
and the Internal Revenue Service (IRS).

Accounts Payable Changes
Global Changes


Aging for all vendors is now recalculated using the system date during
the conversion of version 4.20 and higher.



The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the
General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year.



Previously, historical data was stored by the period to date (PTD), year
to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Accounts Payable vendor
history is now stored by period by year. The conversion for vendor
sales history is now performed as follows:


The PTD record is converted to the current period.



The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period
(for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD
amount should be in May).



The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the prior
year.



You can modify the history data by clicking the Fix button on the
Vendor Maintenance History tab. This button is available only when
security is enabled and the Allow Editing of History Data in Vendor
Maintenance security event is selected in Role Maintenance.



The Number of Months to Retain Check History option was removed.
To retain or display check history in Vendor Maintenance, select the
Track Detailed Invoice/Payment History check box in the Accounts
Payable Options window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

70
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes



You can now post payments of existing invoices to the general ledger
in addition to payments of new invoices entered on the fly. Select the
Manual Check Register in Detail check box in the Accounts Payable
Options window.



Certain memos can now flow from entity to entity based on the
document. For example, an invoice memo would flow to invoice
history.



Time and Billing lines are no longer converted because they can cause
out-of-balance invoice totals that do not match the line totals. If you
have the Time and Billing module installed, contact your Sage
business partner before installing the upgrade.

Data Entry


In the Manual Check Entry window, you can now add multiple general
ledger distribution lines using the Create G/L Distribution button.



The Credit Card Payment Transfer Details window displays transfer
information for payments processed in version 4.20 and higher.

Period End Processing


Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End
Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.



Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing
window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Only Remove Invoices with Zero Balances option has been
replaced by the Remove Zero Balance Invoices task.



The Only Remove Temporary Vendors with Zero Balances option
has been replaced by the Remove Temporary Vendors task.



The Only Clear Check History File option and the Purge Detailed
Invoice/Payment History File options have been replaced by the
Purge Accounts Payable History task.



The Purge Sales Tax History File option has been replaced by the
Purge Sales Tax History task.

Reports and Forms


Report setting options now appear on the header area of the
applicable report window. You can also define and save customized
report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in
the Help system.



Vendor Listing no longer prints the balance data. To print the balance
information, print the new Vendor Listing with Balances.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

71
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Payable Changes



You can now print the remit-to address on checks using A/P Check
Printing or Manual Check Printing without customizing the check form.



Accounts Payable reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports.
Because of this, the Accounts Payable module no longer uses the
settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.



The process for exporting or printing a report or listing to a file has
changed. The Print to File option previously available in the Printer
Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed
from the Printer field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For
more information on how to export or print reports to a file in these
modules, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system.



The process for deferring the printing of a report or listing has
changed. The Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option
accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in
the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the
printing of a report in these modules, see Defer a Report in the Help
system.



The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to
remain in portrait format.



Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located at
...HomeDeferred.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


The Update Purchase Vendor task has been renamed Purchase
Vendor Transfer.



Information that was previously on the Vendor Maintenance History
tab has been moved to the Statistics and Summary tabs. History
information is now maintained using period-sensitive data which
removes the requirement for future buckets and mandatory module
closing.



The Vendor Delete/Renumber/Merge task previously on the Setup
menu has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and
Change Vendors.



The Assign Vendor Schedules task previously on the Setup menu has
been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Assign Vendor Tax
Schedules.



The Sales Tax Calculation task previously on the Setup menu has
been moved to the Utilities menu.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

72
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Accounts Receivable Changes

Accounts Receivable Changes
Memos
Certain memos can now flow from entity to entity based on the document.
For example, an invoice memo would flow to invoice history.

Business Insights Changes
Global Changes


After upgrading to version 4.20, you will need to re-create Business
Insights Reporter reports used in a previous 4.x version of the
software.


For custom reports previously created using version 4.10 or prior
data from the Accounts Payable module, access Business Insights
Reporter and select a report in the Business Insights Reporter
Selection window. You are prompted to print the Business Insights
Reporter Definition Listing and then delete the report. Repeat this
process for each custom report previously created for the Accounts
Payable module.



For custom reports previously created using version 4.05 or prior
data from the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, General
Ledger, Library Master, Return Merchandise Authorization, or Sales
Order modules, access Business Insights Reporter and select a
report in the Business Insights Reporter Selection window. You are
prompted to print the Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing
and then delete the report. Repeat this process for each custom
report previously created for the Accounts Receivable, Bank
Reconciliation, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales Order
modules.



NOTE

For custom reports previously created for all other modules, select
Library Master Utilities menu > Rebuild Business Insights Reporter
Views to rebuild custom reports created with Business Insights
Reporter in a previous 4.x version of the software.

The Business
Insights Reporter
Definition Listing
prints fields,
sorts, and filters
for the report you
need to re-create.

Business Insights Explorer
The new Business Insights Explorer, which provides an alternative
method of accessing data, is now available from the Desktop Tree view
and menu. Predefined views of customers, quotes, sales orders, and
invoices are available, providing a way to quickly view related data and
navigational links to other inquiries or tasks.

Renamed Tasks
Under the Business Insights Dashboard menu, the following tasks have
been renamed:

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

73
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Common Information Changes



Business Insights Options has been renamed Dashboard Options.



Dashboard Selection Wizard (previously named Business Insights
Wizard) has been renamed Dashboard Maintenance Wizard.



Dashboard Selection Listing (previously named Business Insights
Listing) has been renamed Dashboard Maintenance Listing.



Display Business Insights has been renamed Display Dashboard.



Business Insights Automatic Update has been renamed Start
Automatic Dashboard Update.

Common Information Changes
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


Miscellaneous Item Maintenance has been added to the Common
Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Receivable
Setup menu and Sales Order Setup menu.



Bank Code Maintenance has been added to the Common Information
Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Payable Setup menu,
Accounts Receivable Setup menu, Bank Reconciliation Main menu,
and Payroll Setup menu.



Memo Manager Maintenance, previously on the Library Master Setup
menu, has been moved to the Common Information Main menu. This
task remains on the Accounts Payable Setup menu, Accounts
Receivable Setup menu, General Ledger Setup menu, Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu, and Sales Order Setup
menu.



Sales Tax Account Maintenance has been added to the Common
Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Payable
Setup menu and Accounts Receivable Setup menu.



Purge Obsolete Extended Descriptions, previously on the Library
Master Utilities menu, has been moved to the Common Information
Utilities menu.

Customizer Changes
Global Changes


For modules using the Business Framework architecture, the External
Link Definition window now allows you to select business object
columns available to the panel instead of the control names in the
customized library. For example, to select the Customer No. field in the
Sales Order Entry window, you can now select the business object
name, SO_SalesOrder_bus_CustomerNo$, instead of the control
name, ML_CUST$.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

74
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media Reporting)



Customized libraries for the Accounts Payable module must be
re-customized.



Data entry user-defined fields (UDFs) must be re-created in
User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance. After re-creating UDFs,
you must map the UDFs to their respective history files. For more
information, see Map User-Defined Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.



The Accounts Payable Invoice Entry UDFs for both header and lines
will need to be re-created in User-Defined Field and Table
Maintenance. After these UDFs have been created and updated, it is
necessary to map the invoice entry UDFs to their respective history
tables.



For Purchase Order Receipt of Goods, Receipt of Invoice, and Return
of Goods, the new Purchase Order Invoice UDF replaces the Accounts
Payable Invoice UDF. If an Accounts Payable Invoice UDF exists on a
customized Purchase Order .lib file migrated or converted to 4.20, it
must be manually removed, and the Purchase Order Invoice UDF
must be added.



When you have upgraded to version 4.20 and re-created UDFs, the
following list of UDFs are updated to specific tables:


The Accounts Payable Invoice UDFs are updated to the new AP
Invoice History Header table.



The Accounts Payable Invoice Lines UDFs are updated to the new
AP Invoice History Detail table.



The Accounts Payable Vendor UDFs are updated to the new AP
Vendor Master table.

Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media
Reporting)
Global Changes


The Magnetic Media Reporting module has been renamed Electronic
Reporting for W2 and 1099s to accurately reflect the new process
required by the federal government.


Starting from the 2006 tax year, the Internal Revenue Service (IRS)
requires that all payroll and 1099 filings be performed electronically
through the Internet. The federal government will no longer accept
W2 and 1099 information on any type of magnetic media (diskette).
In Sage 100 ERP, you can continue to create a data file compliant
with the IRS published standards and save it on the hard disk.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

75
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Fixed Assets Changes



Some states may still require or accept filings submitted on
magnetic media. If your state supports the Federal reporting format
and accepts submissions on a diskette, you can create the state
diskette by copying the data file you created to a 3.5" diskette. If
your state does not support the Federal reporting format, the
Electronic Reporting module cannot create your electronic file.



The new Electronic File Transfer task allows you to launch the
appropriate government Web site to submit W2 and 1099 files.



You can store the URL information for Electronic Reporting in Library
Master URL Maintenance. Two URL codes and descriptions were
created for the Social Security Administration (SSA) and Internal
Revenue Service (IRS).



The 1099 Magnetic Media Reporting window was renamed 1099
Electronic Reporting. The default disk drive to use is now C.



The W2 Magnetic Media Reporting window was renamed W2
Electronic Reporting. The default disk drive to use is now C.



The Mag Media Tax Type Code field in the Payroll Tax Table
Maintenance window was renamed Electronic Reporting Tax Type
Code.

Fixed Assets Changes
NOTE
The Fixed Assets
module is not
available for
Sage 100
Premium ERP.

Global Changes


The FAS Link module has been renamed Fixed Assets.



The new Fixed Assets Maintenance task is now available on the Fixed
Assets Main menu if Sage Fixed Assets is installed and the Fixed
Assets module is activated.

Payroll Changes
Taxes
NOTE



In the Federal Tax Summary window, the Employee FICA Tips and
Employer FICA Tips fields were added for wages. The Employee FICA
Tip fields were added for payroll taxes.



In Manual Payroll Tax Entry window, the FICA Tip Tax field was added.



In Quarterly Tax Report window, the Print FICA Tip Data check box
was added.



The Payroll
module is not
available for
Sage 100
Premium ERP.

The Mag Media Tax Type Code field in the P/R Tax Table Maintenance
window was renamed Electronic Reporting Tax Type Code. The field
name was changed to accurately reflect the new process required by
the federal government.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

76
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Integrator Changes

Reports
To comply with new regulations regarding how Social Security tips are
being reported, the following reports are modified to show FICA and FICA
tips totals separately:












Quarterly Governmental Report
Payroll Data Entry Audit Report
Payroll Check History Report
Employee Listing
Perpetual History Report
Employee Listing
Employer's Expense Summary
Quarterly Pay Period Recap
Payroll Check Printing
Direct Deposit Stub Printing
Quarterly Tax Report

Visual Integrator Changes
Data Dictionary Listing
File information for the Accounts Payable module is no longer included on
the Data Dictionary Listing. To obtain file information for these modules,
on the Desktop, access the Resources page and click the File Layouts
and Program Information link. You must re-create Visual Integrator jobs
for Accounts Payable.

Import Job Maintenance
If you select an Accounts Payable table for a new job in the V/I Import Job
Selection window, corresponding tables are available for selection at the
Table Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from
any other module is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window,
corresponding files from Accounts Payable are available for selection at
the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window.

Retired Modules
The FAS Select module was retired.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

77
Chapter 9
Workflow Changes in 4.10
Chapter 9

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.10 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global
changes are listed first followed by module retirements.

Accounts Receivable Changes
Global Changes


Aging for all customers is now recalculated using the system date
during the conversion of version 4.10 or higher data.



The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the
General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year.



You can modify the history data by clicking the Fix button on the
Customer Maintenance History tab. This button is only available when
security is enabled and the Allow Editing of History Data in Customer
Maintenance security event is selected in Role Maintenance.



Previously, the historical data was stored by period to date (PTD), year
to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Accounts Receivable
customer sales history is now stored by period by year. The
conversion for customer sales history is now performed as follows:
• The PTD record is converted to the current period.
• The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period
(for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD
amount should be in May).
• The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the
prior year.

Period End Processing


The Salesperson Commission Purge task, previously on the Period
End menu, has been moved to the Utilities menu.



Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End
Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.



Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing
window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Only Remove Temporary Customers with Zero Balances option
has been replaced by the Remove Temporary Customers task.



The Only Remove Invoices with Zero Balances option has been
replaced by the Remove Zero Balance Invoices task.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

78
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Business Insights Changes



The Only Purge Sales Tax History File option has been replaced by
the Purge Sales Tax History task.



The Only Clear Invoice/Shipping History File option has been
replaced by the Purge Accounts Receivable History task.



The Only Recalculate Customer High Balances option has been
replaced by the Recalculate Customer High Balances task.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks


Information that was previously on the Customer Maintenance History
tab has been moved to the Customer Maintenance Statistics and
Summary tabs. History information is now maintained using
period-sensitive data which removes the requirement for future
buckets and mandatory module closing.



The following tasks previously on the Setup menu have been moved to
the Utilities menu: Global Customer Field Change, Sales Tax
Calculation, and Internet Customers Enable/Purge.



The Delete/Renumber/Merge task previously on the Setup menu has
been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and Change
Customers.

Business Insights Changes
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks
The Business Insights tasks are now on a separate module menu.
Previously, the Business Insights tasks were located in a menu under the
Library Master module. Business Insights is now organized on two
submenus: Dashboard and Reporter.

Common Information Changes
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance


Sales codes and miscellaneous items, part of the Accounts Receivable
and Sales Order modules, are now referred to as Miscellaneous items
and are stored in a common file shared by both modules.



Miscellaneous items are now designated by the following item types:
Miscellaneous items, Charge items, and Comment items. Comment
codes are now referred to as Comment items and Miscellaneous
Charges are now referred to as Charge items.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

79
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Customizer Changes

Customizer Changes
Global Changes


When upgrading from Level 3.7x, customized libraries for the
Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, General Ledger,
eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales
Order modules will not be migrated and must be re-created after the
migration process.



After upgrading to Version 4.10, data entry UDFs must be re-created in
User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance. After re-creating UDFs,
you must map the UDFs to their respective history files. For more
information, see Map User-Defined Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.



The link between the AR Invoice and Job Cost Header entity in Job
Billing Entry has been replaced by a link between the Job Cost Billing
entity and the Job Cost Header entity.



The Accounts Receivable and Sales Order Invoice Data Entry UDFs
for both header and lines will need to be recreated in UDF and Table
Maintenance. After these UDFs have been established and updated, it
is necessary to map the invoice entry UDFs to their respective history
files.



Job Cost Job Billing Entry has a new Job Cost Billing UDF that
replaces the Accounts Receivable Invoice UDF. The Job Invoice UDF
file is now the history file for Job Billing Entry’s Job Cost Billing UDF.
The Accounts Receivable Invoice UDF is no longer available in Job
Billing Entry. The ARI Entity UDF that exists on a customized lib and is
migrated or converted to 4.10 will have to be manually removed from
the 4.10 lib.



The Inventory Master file UDF has been merged into the CI_Item file.
Use the Common Item File in User-Defined Field and Table
Maintenance to create UDFs and maintain existing UDFs. The IM_90
file is no longer available. SAP Crystal Reports that previously used
the IM_90 file should be modified to use the CI_Item file. The IM_90
UDF will need to be manually removed from the Inventory
Maintenance .lib file.



In User-Defined Field Maintenance, pound signs (###) previously used
in the Mask field for a String data type UDF are now invalid. When
editing an existing UDF with a mask, the pound signs will be replaced
with Z.s and any separators will need to be retyped. Pound signs are
only valid for Numeric data type UDFs. For more information, see
Format Masks in the Customizer Help system.



Previously, separators used in UDFs were saved to the applicable data
files. In Version 4.10, separators are not saved. After upgrading to
Version 4.10, use SAP Crystal Reports to reformat UDF data on
custom reports.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

80
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Customizer Changes



Conversion with AP Invoices in AP Invoice Data Entry will leave
orphan records in the AP_95 that are assigned the invoice data entry
sequence number. These records need to be manually removed using
the Data File Display and Maintenance task. To identify orphan
records, the sequence number in the key field for invoices removed
during conversion will start with a 99900001, etc.



RA_91 UDFs will be added only to the Receipts History Header table.
You will need to create new UDFs for the Receipts Header table, then
go into the history table and map the new UDF to the existing UDF
which was migrated.



RA_96 UDFs will be added only to the Receipts History Detail table.
You will need to create new UDFs for the Receipts Detail table, then go
into the history table and map the new UDF to the existing UDF which
was migrated.



Pound signs (###) which were allowed for masking a String data type
UDF are no longer allowed in Version 4.10 as this is an invalid format
for a string (for more information, see String Format Table in the Help
system). In Version 4.10, when editing a UDF with a Mask of #’s, the
#’s are changed to Z’s. The separator will need to be re-added. Pound
signs (###) are only allowed on Numeric data type UDFs.



For modules upgrading to 4.10, some modules wrote the Mask
separator to the UDF data file. UDF values for 4.x modules are written
without the separator. During the 4.10 conversion, separators included
in the UDF records in the UDF data file will be removed. This will only
occur for String data type UDFs.



When upgrading from a previous Version of 4.x, the following list of
UDFs are updated to specific tables:


Accounts Receivable Invoice UDFs are updated to the AR Invoice
History Header table.



Accounts Receivable Invoice Line UDFs are updated to the AR
Invoice History Detail table.



The Sales Order Entry UDFs are updated to the SO Sales Order
Header and the SO Sales Order History Header tables.



The Sales Order Detail UDFs are updated to the SO Sales Order
Detail and the SO Sales Order History Detail tables.



The Return Merchandise Authorization Receipt Entry/History
Header UDFs are updated to the RA Receipts History Header table.



The Return Merchandise Authorization Receipt Entry/History Lines
UDFs are updated to the RA Receipts History Detail table.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

81
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
eBusiness Manager Changes



The eBusiness Manager Customer UDFs are updated to the IT
Shopping Cart Header and IT UID Customer Change tables.



The eBusiness Manager Shopping Cart Item UDFs are updated to
the IT Shopping Cart Item and IT Shopping Cart Items Selected
tables.

eBusiness Manager Changes
Global Changes


The Microsoft Web Publishing Wizard is no longer installed or
supported. You must now publish eBusiness Manager images,
JavaScripts, and style sheets to the Internet Information Server (IIS)
using your own FTP software. For more information, see Publish Files
to the Internet in the eBusiness Manager Help system.



The Publish Files to Web task, which was located on the Setup menu,
has been removed as it used the Microsoft Web Publishing Wizard
which is no longer supported.



The polling process that formerly performed the real-time automatic
updates for user IDs, customers, and sales orders from the Sage Web
Engine has been removed. The options that controlled how often the
polling process polled for shopping cart entries and customer/user ID
changes have therefore also been removed from IT Options.



You can no longer enter the SMTP server address in IT Options. It
must be entered in Company Maintenance in the Library Master
module before you can generate e-mail in eBusiness Manager.

Return Merchandise Authorization Changes
Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks
Various options previously included in the RMA Utilities task have been
moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Purge Expired RMAs option has been replaced by the Purge
Expired RMA task.



The Purge Return Reason Detail option has been replaced by the
Purge Return Reason Detail task.



The Purge RMA Receipts History option has been replaced by the
Purge RMA Receipts History task.



The Create Customer Invoice Search Records option has been
replaced by the Create Customer Invoice Search Records task.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

82
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sales Order Changes

Sales Order Changes
Global Changes
If the Inventory Management module is integrated with Sales Order, you
can now retain a customer's last purchase price information for both
inventory items and miscellaneous items. Previously, you could retain the
last purchase price information for inventory items only.

Sales History


Previously, sales history was saved by period and month. With version
4.10 and higher, sales history is now continuously saved by invoice
date and posting date.



With version 4.10 and higher, you must retain at least two years of
sales history at the Years to Retain Sales History field in the Sales
Order Options window, with the option to retain up to 99 years.



Because of the new method for saving history, the Enter Customer
Sales History Option by Customer Type check box and the Customer
Type/Option fields in Sales Order Options have been removed.

Sales History Reports

NOTE
These reports
contain data as of
the date of the
conversion to
4.10 or higher.

Because sales history is now saved by invoice date and posting date, four
new reports, Sales Recap by Division, Sales Recap by Product Line,
Sales Recap by Warehouse, and Sales Recap by Warehouse and
Product Line replace the Monthly Recap by Division, Monthly Recap by
Product Line, Monthly Recap by Warehouse, and Monthly Recap by
Warehouse and Product Line reports. After upgrading to version 4.10 or
higher, if you need to reference the Monthly Recap reports or the previous
Customer Sales History report, select File > Run and type the following in
the Run Program window:



SOWRJA to access the Monthly Recap by Product Line report
SOWRKA to access the Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line

report


SOWRLA to access the Monthly Recap by Warehouse report



SOWRMA to access the Monthly Recap by Division report



SOWRNA to access the Customer Sales History report

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

83
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sales Order Changes

Period End Processing
Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End
Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.
Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window
have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:


The Purge Sales Order History option has been replaced by the Purge
Order/Quote History task.



The Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders and Purge Expired Price
Quotes options have been replaced by the Purge Expired
Orders/Quotes task.



The Purge Sales Order Recap option has been replaced by the Purge
Sales Order Recap task.

Job Cost Integration
Because the Job Cost module can now be integrated with Sales Order,
the way that job costs are posted can affect statements of profitability. If
you are upgrading from version 4.05 or prior, make sure you plan how to
post job costs before upgrading.


If job costs are posted from the Accounts Payable or Purchase Order
module, do not select the Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost check box in
the Sales Order Options window. If this check box is selected, costs
can potentially be posted to the Job Cost module from more than one
module, resulting in an understatement of profitability.



If the Accounts Payable or Purchase Order modules are not integrated
with Job Cost, select the Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost check box in
the Sales Order Options window. If this check box is not selected,
costs may not be posted to the Job Cost module at all, resulting in an
overstatement of profitability.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

84
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Integrator Changes

Visual Integrator Changes
Data Dictionaries
After installing Version 4.10, before you use the Visual Integrator module,
select Visual Integrator Main menu > Export Job Maintenance. This
executes the necessary update of the Data Dictionaries so that you can
successfully create Visual Integrator jobs.

Data Dictionary Listing
File information for the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation,
eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales Order
modules is no longer included on the Data Dictionary Listing. To obtain file
information for these modules, on the Desktop, access the Resources
page and click the File Layouts and Program Information link. You must
re-create Visual Integrator jobs for these modules.

Import Job Maintenance
When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job Maintenance,
the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In the V/I Import Job
Selection window, you can enter a new job name or select an existing job.
For new jobs, you must select the table (previously referred to as File
Name) for which the import will be prepared. After a table is selected, the
Import Job Maintenance window appears. If an Accounts Receivable,
Bank Reconciliation, Common Information, eBusiness Manager, Return
Merchandise Authorization, or Sales Order table is selected in the V/I
Import Job Selection window, only these tables are available for selection
at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in the Import
Job Maintenance window. If a table from a module other than Accounts
Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, Common Information, eBusiness
Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, or Sales Order is selected in
the V/I Import Job Selection window, files from any other module are
available at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

85
Chapter 10
Workflow Changes in 4.00
Chapter 10

This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product
for the 4.00 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global
changes are listed first followed by module retirements.

Installation Changes
NOTE
Remote
administration of
the Application
Server can be
performed using
a Terminal
Services session
because this
functionality is
not part of the
Application
Server.



The Sage 100 Advanced ERP Host and Host Enterprise Manager are
no longer used for the Sage 100 Advanced ERP installation and are
replaced by the Sage 100 Advanced ERP Application Server. For
more information, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's
Guide.



If you are upgrading from version 4.00,you must perform an in-place
upgrade.

Global Changes
Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE)
You can now resize ALE windows.

Desktop
The Launcher has been renamed Business Desktop.

Help System and Online Manuals
The Help system has been expanded and updated to provide immediate
access to all of the information previously found in the online PDF
manuals.

Upgrading Level 3.x Data
The new file structures in versions 4.x provide flexibility for both Sage and
development partners to make enhancements for you in the future. As a
result, some steps must be taken to prepare your Level 3.x or 4.x data for
migration to version 4.40.


During the migration process, user codes with leading blanks or
special characters will not be migrated. You will need to re-create
these user codes after the migration process. After upgrading your
data, print and review the System Conversion log.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

86
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes

Module and Accounting Dates


The Library Master module now uses the Windows system date.



Your date formats are now based on the Windows Regional Settings
from your workstation for consistency across your entire desktop.
Therefore, the default settings for Year Display Format and Year 2000
Default have been removed. The software does not support the "year
first" Windows date format. If you enter a two-digit year, the century is
determined by the century preferences setting in the Windows
Regional Settings for your workstation.



The F6 functionality which allowed you to toggle between a 2-digit year
(05/31/10) and a 4-digit year (05/31/2010) has been removed to
accommodate the Windows Regional Settings.

Registering Your Modules
You now have 45 days to access unregistered modules. Previously, you
could access the module 40 times only.

Security
WARNING
After security is
enabled, it cannot
be disabled.

Version 4.00 introduced a new security model, which is role based rather
than menu based. Security in your Level 3.x software will not be migrated
to your version 4.40 software; however, you can choose to migrate users
from your Level 3.x software to your version 4.40 software, if you select
the Standard Security option during installation. To enable security, refer
to your Installation and System Administrator's Guide.
When All is selected at the Operand field, the operand now changes
automatically based on the Value fields entered. If you enter the first
Value field only, the operand changes to Equal to, then if you enter the
second Value field, the operand changes to Range.

Library Master Changes
Changed Tasks


Reports, registers, and journals in the General Ledger, Library Master,
and Customizer modules and the Daily Transaction Register from
subsidiary modules except for Job Cost, Material Requirements
Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are now SAP Crystal Reports files.
As a result, printers defined in Device Configurator no longer apply to
printing these documents. Use a Windows printer for printing the
documents.



The Data File Display and Maintenance task has been enhanced with
a new program. The new program determines if data is for Level 3.x or
version 4.x. A new field lists the different secondary keys available and
sorts the records in the file being displayed according to the key
selected.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

87
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Library Master Changes

Companies
A Copy button has been added to Company Maintenance, allowing you to
copy data and forms from an existing company. As a result, the SVFCPY
and SVDATA utilities have been removed.

Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks
NOTE



Information from the Preferences task has been moved to the User
Maintenance, Company Maintenance, and System Configuration
tasks. As a result, the Preferences task has been removed.



Information from the Alternate Directory Maintenance task has been
moved to the Change Data Location dialog box, which is accessed by
clicking Change Data Location on the Company Maintenance
Preferences tab. As a result, the Alternate Directory Maintenance task
has been removed.



The Role Maintenance task replaces the Menu Security Maintenance
task.



The functionality of the Resize Data Files task has been incorporated
into the Rebuild Application Key Files task. As a result, the Resize
Data Files task has been removed.



The System Activity Log has been renamed Activity Log.



The Uninstall Modules task has been added to the System
Configuration task.



The Chat functionality has been removed from the Master Console
task.



The functionality of the Visual Explorer task has been added to the
right-click menu accessed from the Sage 100 ERP Desktop Tree View.
As a result, the Visual Explorer task has been removed. For more
information, see Open a Task in a Secondary Company in the Help
system.



Registration information from the Product Registration Maintenance
task has been moved to the System Configuration task. As a result,
the Product Registration Maintenance task has been removed.



The Installed Modules Listing on the Library Master Reports menu
replaces the *part utility.



For information
about changes to
the date format
settings that
previously
resided in the
Preferences task,
See Module and
Accounting Dates
on page 87.

The following Library Master tasks have been removed because they
are no longer needed:
• Convert Evolution/2 Data Files
• Data Dictionary Transfer
• Maintain Explorer Menu

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

88
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Business Insights Changes

• Rebuild Alternate Directory Pointers
• Task Menu Maintenance
• SVMUPD, SVFCPY, and SVDATA utilities

Business Insights Changes
Business Insights Reporter
The Business Insights Reporter menu includes the tasks, Business
Insights Reporter, and Business Insights Reporter Listing. You can use
Business Insights Reporter to create SAP Crystal Reports forms and
reports for all modules. These reports can optionally be added to the
Custom Reports menu for a specified module.

Customizer Changes
Global Changes


When upgrading to Version 4.00, General Ledger user-defined fields
will be updated to the GL_Account data file; however, General Ledger
library customizations will not be migrated and must be re-created
after the migration process.



The PostMaster Conversion Utility previously accessed from the
Customizer Main menu has been removed because the PostMaster
module has been retired.

General Ledger Changes
Accounts
The ability to have a general ledger account number of up to
32 characters and 10 segments means that the way in which accounts
are maintained has changed. The main account (also known as the
natural account) is now maintained separately from the other individual
segments. As a result, the system has changed in the following ways:


The copy function is no longer available in Account Maintenance. The
copy function is now available in Main Account Maintenance and Sub
Account Maintenance.



The process for creating new accounts in Account Maintenance has
changed. To create an account in Account Maintenance, you must
enter a valid combination of an existing main account and sub
accounts. For more information, see Create and Maintain Accounts in
Account Maintenance in the Help system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

89
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
General Ledger Changes



Options that control how general ledger accounts can be created and
added on the fly have changed in General Ledger Options. The Add
new accounts from data entry check box has been removed and
replaced with the Auto Create when all Segments are Valid field, Add
Main Accounts in General Ledger check box, and Add Sub Accounts
in General Ledger check box. For more information about these fields,
see General Ledger Options in the Help system.

Allocations
To support new features in allocations, as well as to make the terminology
more intuitive, the following changes were made in the system:


The Allocation Maintenance task has been renamed Allocation Entry.
The Allocation Entry task is accessed by selecting General Ledger
Main menu > Allocation Entry.



The Allocation Entry task has been renamed Manual Allocation Entry.
The Manual Allocation Entry task is accessed by selecting General
Ledger Main menu > General Journal Entry. In the General Journal
Entry window, click Copy From. In the Copy From window, select the
Allocation option and click OK.



The method of calculating masked allocation distributions has
changed. The allocation is now calculated first, then the total amount is
distributed to all the accounts that match the masked account.
Previously, the allocation percent/quantity entered was distributed to
each account that matched the masked account.



The activity or balance for Period, Quarterly, and Annual allocation
cycles is now allocated based on the entire selected cycle rather than
just the period ending that cycle. For example, now a quarterly
allocation distributes the activity for the entire quarter. Previously,
quarterly and annual allocations used the activity for the current period
as the allocation amount. For example, previously a quarterly
allocation generated at the end of the third period used only the activity
for period 3, not the activity for periods 1, 2, and 3.



In Allocation Selection, there are now separate allocation totals for
financial and nonfinancial allocations.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

90
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
General Ledger Changes

Custom Financials
In order to have maximum flexibility and customization capabilities, you
should use Sage Management Intelligence (SMI) for your custom
financial reporting needs; however, Sage recognizes that you may have
expended considerable time and effort in creating custom financial reports
and want to continue using them. Although the Custom Financials menu
has been removed, it can still be accessed by using a hidden utility, as
long as you do not expand your general ledger account beyond nine
characters and three segments.


You can access the Custom Financials menu and tasks by selecting
File > Run and typing *unhidegl in the Run Program window.



The Custom Financials tasks can only be accessed if you have
general ledger account numbers with nine or fewer characters and
three or fewer segments.

Standard Financials
The Standard Financial Statements have been renamed Financial
Reports and have been enhanced to include the former Monthly Trend
Report.

Data Entry


The system now calculates beginning balances for each fiscal year
based on prior year data. As a result, the Beginning Balance (BB)
source journal has been removed. To post beginning balances for a
new company, you must enter them as journal entries to your general
ledger accounts and update them.



In Transaction Journal Entry, the logic for the offset postings has
changed. The Debit/Credit field has been renamed Offset field. During
conversion, the source journal orientation will be changed to Credit if it
was previously Debit, and it will be changed to Debit if it was
previously Credit. Previously, the value selected at the Debit/Credit
field determined the orientation of the lines. Now the value selected at
the Offset field determines the orientation of the offset only.



When you use General Ledger Exchange to import transactions into
the General Ledger module, transactions now import to the General
Journal Entry files. Previously, transactions were imported directly to
the history files. This change was made because of the large number
of inter-related tables that must be updated and linked when each
transaction is posted. After the import is complete, the General Journal
must be printed and updated.

NOTE
For information
about changes to
customizations
for General
Ledger lookups,
See Advanced
Lookup Engine
(ALE) on
page 38.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

91
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
General Ledger Changes

Period End Processing
Many of the functions previously found in Period End Processing have
been moved. Only full period-end processing can be performed from this
task. In addition, to support the reopening and closing of periods, the
Fiscal Year Consolidation and Consolidate Detail Records logic has been
removed. Previously, you could perform the following tasks from Period
End Processing:


Full period-end processing



Consolidate General Ledger Detail Records



Purge Transaction Detail History



Purge Period Summary History

The new location of various functions follows:


The Clear Next Year Current Budgets logic is now performed in Budget
Maintenance.



The Purge Transaction Detail History task has been renamed Purge
General Ledger History and is now accessible from the General
Ledger Utilities menu.



Journal and register numbers are now reset separately based on the
selections at the Reset Journal Numbers During and Reset Register
Numbers During fields in the General Ledger Options window.

The following changes have been made to year-end processing:


The Years to Retain General Ledger History field in the General
Ledger Options window now applies to both summary and detail
history information. As a result, the Number of Years to Retain
Summary History field in the General Ledger Options window has
been removed.



The Posting to Retained Earnings and Updating Beginning Balances
logic has been removed as this is now done through the data entry
update routines and the Daily Transaction Register. If the next fiscal
year has not been created, year-end processing will create the next
fiscal year and recalculate beginning balances.



Zero budget accounts are now removed from the Period Budget Detail
file when all periods for any year are zero.



The Copy Budget at Year End option has been modified to use the
new Copy Actual to Default Budget at Year End check box in the
General Ledger Options window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

92
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Integrator Changes

Reports


The Budget and History Report has been separated into two reports,
the Budget and History Report and the Budget and History Report by
Period.



The Standard Financial Statements have been renamed Financial
Reports. The Financial Reports now include the former Monthly Trend
Report.

Renamed and Removed Tasks


To provide more flexibility in giving users access to tasks, the Account
Inquiry task is now a security event. To give users access to Account
Inquiry, use Library Master Role Maintenance to set up users with
View Only access to Account Maintenance.



The Account Maintenance task has been removed from all subsidiary
modules because all installations require the General Ledger module.



The Account Group Maintenance task replaces the Account Break
Maintenance task. In Version 4.00, the term account group is now
used in place of account break.



The Sub Account Maintenance task replaces the Department
Maintenance task.

Visual Integrator Changes
Data Dictionaries
After installing Version 4.00, before you use the Visual Integrator module,
select Visual Integrator Main menu > Export Job Maintenance. This
executes the necessary update of the Data Dictionaries so that you can
successfully create Visual Integrator jobs.

Data Dictionary Listing
General Ledger files are no longer available in the Data Dictionary Listing
(Visual Integrator Main menu > Data Dictionary Listing). Instead, use the
Technical Reference and Support Guide (TRSG) for a listing of General
Ledger files.

Import Job Maintenance


When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job
Maintenance, the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In
the V/I Import Job Selection window, you can enter a new job name or
select an existing job. For new jobs, you must select the table
(previously referred to as File Name) for which the import will be
prepared. After a table is selected, the Import Job Maintenance
window appears. If a General Ledger table is selected in the V/I Import

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

93
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Retired Modules

Job Selection window, only General Ledger tables are available for
selection at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in
the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from a module other
than General Ledger is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection
window, files from all modules other than General Ledger are available
at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window.


In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a General
Ledger job the Records tab is no longer available because there are
no record types in General Ledger. Also, the Validation tab is no longer
available because validation is done by the system. When you create
a job for a module other than General Ledger in the Import Job
Maintenance window, the Records tab and Validation tab are available.



In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a General
Ledger job, you cannot test or execute the import job until your system
administrator gives you the rights to execute the job in Role
Maintenance. Previously, system security did not prevent you from
immediately executing General Ledger jobs.

Export Jobs
You can no longer export General Ledger jobs using Export Job
Maintenance. Instead, select General Ledger Utilities menu > General
Ledger Exchange to export General Ledger jobs. You can still export jobs
from any module other than General Ledger using Export Job
Maintenance.

Retired Modules
The following modules were retired:






Client Write-Up (If you need Client Write-Up functionality, contact your
Sage business partner)
Import Master
PostMaster
TimeSlips Link
Visual PostMaster

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

94
Appendix A
Checklists
Appendix A

Before beginning the installation, test and validate all the hardware and
network configurations using the following:


The Installation and System Administrator's Guide, which can be found
by selecting a product from the installation Autorun screen, and then
clicking Documentation on the product screen. The guide is in Adobe
Acrobat (PDF) format.



The Supported Platform Matrix, which can be found on the Support
page on the Sage Customer Portal at:
https://customers.sagenorthamerica.com



The current support library for any pertinent information, particularly
the Hot Pre-Installation Information page, which can be found on the
Support page on the Sage Customer Portal at:
https://customers.sagenorthamerica.com

Upgrade and Conversion Process
The upgrade process consists of three steps:
1

Preparing your data for upgrading

2

Upgrading your data to version 2014

3

Converting your data to version 2014

This appendix contains the information you will need to upgrade and
convert your data based on the version of your data. Proceed to the
applicable section as follows:









Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 on page 96
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 on page 102
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014
on page 108
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 on page 113
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 on page 120
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 on page 128
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 on page 136
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 on page 143

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

95
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014
When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation.
Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library
Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult
with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.
If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the
instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation
and System Administrators Guide.
Even if the Sage CRM installation integrated with your
Sage 100 ERP 2013 installation has already been upgraded to version
7.2, there are steps you must follow to make the database compatible
with version 2014.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 2013 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 2013 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

Rebuild all data files.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.



If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced
ERP, use the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities.



If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP, use the
Rebuild Sort File utility.

You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.
5____

Print all customized form definitions.

6____

If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

96
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 96, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

1____

In your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 2013 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration
window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears,
no action is required.

2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP 2013 to
Sage 100 Premium ERP 2014, follow the steps below.
When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf
and MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is
required for the initial migration.
Also, include the company databases and log files for each
company that you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC
company, copy the MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf
databases.
a Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases
installed in your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System
database.
b In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that
you will migrate from your 2013 installation to your 2014
installation.
c In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases and the
related database transaction logs from the 2013
..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014
..MSSQLData folder.
d In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the
2014 installation and reattach them to the 2013 installation.
e On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage
program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration.
f Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

97
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

3____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

4____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

5____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

6____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 96 and
the Upgrade Checklist on page 97, you are now ready to convert your
data to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.

3____

If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

98
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

4____

If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server
Options, and update the following information as needed.


Integration server port ID



Sage CRM SQL server name



Sage CRM SQL database name

The server name and database name should reference the mirror
installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP
2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data.
5____

6____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

8____

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

9____
Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

7____

NOTE

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.

Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.
If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.
To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

99
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
10____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.
11____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import and
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
12____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
13____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
14____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.
15____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
16____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

100
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014

17____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
18____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
19____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
20____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
21____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
22____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

101
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014
When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation.
Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library
Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult
with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.
If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the
instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation
and System Administrators Guide.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.50 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 4.50 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you use credit card processing, verify that you have a valid
credit card encryption key in Company Maintenance for proper
conversion of credit card data.

5____

Rebuild all data files.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.



If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced
ERP, use the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities.



If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP, use the
Rebuild Sort File utility.

You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.
6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

102
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 102, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
1____
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

In your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.50 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration
window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears,
no action is required.

2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP 4.50 to
Sage 100 Premium ERP 2014, follow the steps below.
When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf
and MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is
required for the initial migration.
Also, include the company databases and log files for each
company that you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC
company, copy the MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf
databases.
a Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases
installed in your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System
database.
b In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that
you will migrate from your 4.50 installation to your 2014
installation.
c In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases from the
4.50 ..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014
..MSSQLData folder.
d In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the
2014 installation and reattach them to the 4.50 installation.
e On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage
program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration.
f Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard.

3____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

103
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

4____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

5____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

6____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 102 and
the Upgrade Checklist on page 103, you are now ready to convert your
data to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in
Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being
processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information,
see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help
system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

104
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.
4____

If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server
Options, and update the following information as needed.


Integration server port ID



Sage CRM SQL server name



Sage CRM SQL database name

The server name and database name should reference the mirror
installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP
2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data.
5____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.

6____

If you have customers with national accounts and credit cards are
assigned to the sold-to customers, review those records to
determine whether the credit card information should be manually
transferred to the bill-to customer.

7____

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

8____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

9____

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

105
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.
NOTE
Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.
To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.
12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import and
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

106
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014

15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.
16____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
17____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
18____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
19____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
20____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
21____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
22____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
23____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

107
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP
version 2014
Before upgrading your data to version 2014, you must perform a parallel
installation and run the Parallel Migration utility from the Windows Start
menu > All Programs > Sage program group. For more information,
consult with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.45 data for upgrade. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade. Several steps should be
completed by a SQL Server® administrator.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 4.45 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Sort File utility. You must
answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

5____

Print all customized form definitions.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on this page, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf and
MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is required for
the initial migration.
Also, include the company databases and log files for each company that
you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC company, copy the
MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf databases.
1____

In you version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path for your
version 4.45 system. This utility backs up some system files in
your new installation before they are overwritten by the upgrade
process. It is critical that this step is completed before performing
any data upgrade steps.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

108
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014

2____

Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases in
your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System database.

3____

In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that
you will migrate from your 4.45 installation to your 2014
installation.

4____

In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases from the 4.45
..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014
..MSSQLData folder.

5____

In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the
2014 installation and reattach them to the 2013 installation.

6____

On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage
program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration.

7____

Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard.

8____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

9____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014.

10____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.
11____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 108 and
the Upgrade Checklist on page 108, you are now ready to convert your
data to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

109
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014

If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.
3____

Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in
Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being
processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information,
see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help
system.
If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.

4____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.

5____

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

6____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

7____

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

110
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014

8____

Test your modified SAP Crystal reports and forms. Use SAP
Crystal Reports Designer to modify reports as needed.
You must either be logged on using a Windows account that has
read access to the applicable SQL Server database, or you must
have a separate SQL Server authenticated logon ID and
password. Integrated Security is used by default; if your Windows
account does not have rights to the database, a logon dialog box
appears, allowing you to enter a different logon ID and password
for database access.
Before modifying forms or the standard Crystal reports found on
the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of
SAP Crystal Reports.

9____

If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.

10____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new
file layouts.
11____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
12____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.
13____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
14____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
15____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
16____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

111
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014

17____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
18____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
19____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
20____ Test all printers, that you normally use for printing forms and
reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined.
21____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

112
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014
When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation.
Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library
Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult
with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.
If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the
instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation
and System Administrators Guide.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.40 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 4.40 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you are upgrading from version 4.40 Product Update 4 and
higher, verify that you have a valid credit card encryption key in
Company Maintenance for proper conversion of credit card data.

5____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort
File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

113
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 113, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
1____
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.40 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration
window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears,
no action is required.

2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014,
Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program
group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data.

3____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

4____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

5____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

6____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

114
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 113 and
the Upgrade Checklist on page 114, you are now ready to convert your
data to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in
Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being
processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information,
see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help
system.
If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.

4____

If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server
Options, and update the following information as needed.


Integration server port ID



Sage CRM SQL server name

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

115
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014



Sage CRM SQL database name

The server name and database name should reference the mirror
installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP
2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data.
5____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.

6____

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

7____

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

8____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

9____

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.
NOTE
Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.
To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

116
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.
12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.
16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

117
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
20____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
21____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
22____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
23____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
24____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
25____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

118
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014

26____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

119
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014
When to upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel
installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the
Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information,
consult with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.
If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the
instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation
and System Administrators Guide.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.30 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 4.30 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you use credit card processing and are upgrading from version
4.30 Service Update 18 through 23, verify that you have a valid
credit card encryption key in Company Maintenance for proper
conversion of credit card data.

5____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort
File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more
information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system.

8____

If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following
Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report,
Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by
Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse
Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no
longer available beginning with version 4.10.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

120
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

9____

If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review
the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection
window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the
reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each
report.
For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport,
CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy
CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and
CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales."
For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system.

10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 120, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
1____
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.30 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item
codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and
Transaction Detail files.


NOTE
The quantities in
your warehouse,
tier, and
transaction
inventory data
files must match
before you can
upgrade your
data to version
2014.

To fix the files, in your version 4.30 data, use Inventory
Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance.

b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the
quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data
files.


Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.



To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility.

c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory
quantities.
Run this utility for each warehouse.



Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide



In the Action column, select the action to perform for each
item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type.

121
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014



If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, in the Action
column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You
must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity.
After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these
valuation methods.



If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the
warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you
must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse
quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this
utility for those valuation methods.



For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in
the Help system.

d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure
corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail.
2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014,
Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program
group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data.

3____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

4____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

5____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

6____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

122
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 120 and the
Upgrade Checklist on page 121, you are now ready to convert your data
to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in
Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being
processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information,
see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help
system.
If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.

4____

If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server
Options, and update the following information as needed.


Integration server port ID



Sage CRM SQL server name

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

123
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014



Sage CRM SQL database name

The server name and database name should reference the mirror
installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP
2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data.
5____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.
Re-customize the customized libraries for the Bar Code, Bill of
Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order modules.

6____

7____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

9____

NOTE

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

8____

Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.
If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

124
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.
12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

125
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.
17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
20____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the
bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During
conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number
in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in
Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in
Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code
Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct
Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is
entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes
are noted in the conversion log.
21____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
22____ Compare the following version 4.30 and 2014 reports because
sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts
Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive
Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open
Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report.
23____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
24____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
25____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
26____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

126
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014

27____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
28____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

127
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014
When to upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel
installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the
Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information,
consult with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.
If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the
instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation
and System Administrators Guide.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.20 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a backup of your version 4.20 MAS90 folder, which
includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step
following your usual backup process. For specific support on how
to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or
contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the
1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports,
perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and
before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being
placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is
performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing.

5____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort
File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more
information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system.

8____

If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following
Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report,
Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by
Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse
Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no
longer available beginning with version 4.10.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

128
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

9____

If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review
the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection
window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the
reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each
report.
For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport,
CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy
CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and
CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales."
For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system.

10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 128, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
1____
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.20 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item
codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and
Transaction Detail files.


To fix the files, in your version 4.20 data, use Inventory
Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance.

b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the
quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data
files.



NOTE
The quantities in
your warehouse,
tier, and
transaction
inventory data
files must match
before you can
upgrade your
data to version
2014.

Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.
To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility.

c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory
quantities.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide



Run this utility for each warehouse.



At the Action column, select the action to perform for each
item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type.

129
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014



If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action
column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You
must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity.
After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these
valuation methods.



If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the
warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you
must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse
quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this
utility for those valuation methods.



For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in
the Help system.

d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure
corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail.
2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014,
Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program
group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data.

3____

If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are
installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the
WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your
server.

4____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

5____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

6____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

7____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

130
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 128 and the
Upgrade Checklist on page 129, you are now ready to convert your data
to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in
Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being
processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information,
see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help
system.
If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment
Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment
Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange
Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing
account.

4____

If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server
Options, and update the following information as needed.


Integration server port ID



Sage CRM SQL server name

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

131
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014



Sage CRM SQL database name

The server name and database name should reference the mirror
installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP
2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing
Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System
Administrator’s Guide.
After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data.
5____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.
Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than
Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation,
eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise
Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order.

6____

7____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

9____
NOTE

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

8____

Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.
If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

132
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.
12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

133
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.
17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
20____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the
bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During
conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number
in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in
Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in
Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code
Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct
Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is
entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes
are noted in the conversion log.
21____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
22____ Compare the following version 4.20 and 2014 reports because
sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts
Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive
Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open
Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report.
23____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
24____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
25____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
26____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

134
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014

27____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
28____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

135
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014
Prior to upgrading your version 4.10 data to version 2014, you must
perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel
Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your
data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.10 data for upgrading. This should be
done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a copy of your version 4.10 MAS90 folder, which includes
data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your
usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up
your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact
the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the
1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports,
perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and
before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being
placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is
performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing.

5____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort
File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more
information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system.

8____

If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following
Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report,
Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by
Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse
Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no
longer available beginning with version 4.10.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

136
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

9____

If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review
the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection
window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the
reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each
report.
For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport,
CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy
CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and
CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales."
For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system.

10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 136, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
1____
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.10 system. Run the reports and
utilities that appear.
a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item
codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and
Transaction Detail files.


To fix the files, in your version 4.10 data, use Inventory
Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance.

b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the
quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data
files.



NOTE
The quantities in
your warehouse,
tier, and
transaction
inventory data
files must match
before you can
upgrade your
data to version
2014.

Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.
To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility.

c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory
quantities.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide



Run this utility for each warehouse.



At the Action column, select the action to perform for each
item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type.

137
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014



If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action
column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You
must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity.
After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these
valuation methods.



If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the
warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you
must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse
quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this
utility for those valuation methods.



For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in
the Help system.

d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure
corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail.
2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014,
Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program
group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data.

3____

If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are
installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the
WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your
server.

4____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

5____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

6____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

7____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

138
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 136 and the
Upgrade Checklist on page 137, you are now ready to convert your data
to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Update customized panels, by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields.
Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than
Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation,
eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise
Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order.

4____

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

139
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

5____

Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library
Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear
in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button
in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files,
see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system.

6____

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

7____

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

8____

Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.

NOTE

If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.

Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
9____

If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

140
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

10____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.
11____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
12____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
13____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.
14____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.
15____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
16____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
17____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window.
18____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the
bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During
conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number
in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in
Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in
Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code
Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct
Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is
entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes
are noted in the conversion log.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

141
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014

19____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
20____ Compare the following version 4.10 and 2014 reports because
sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts
Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive
Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open
Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report.
21____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module,
after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
22____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
23____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
24____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
25____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
26____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

142
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014
Prior to upgrading your version 4.00 or 4.05 data to version 2014, you
must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel
Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your
data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner.
If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules,
consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to
beginning the upgrade process.

Pre-Upgrade Checklist
You must prepare your version 4.00 or 4.05 data for upgrading. This
should be done for each company you plan to upgrade.
1____

Process all pending credit card transactions.

2____

Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may
result in loss of data.

3____

Create a copy of your version 4.x MAS90 folder, which includes
data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your
usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up
your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact
the vendor from whom you purchased that product.

4____

If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the
1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports,
perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and
before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being
placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is
performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing.

5____

Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort
File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions.

6____

Print all customized form definitions.

7____

Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more
information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system.

8____

Print the following Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales
History Report, Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly
Recap by Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by
Warehouse Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These
reports are no longer available beginning with version 4.10.

NOTE
You must print
and update all
journals and
registers to
prevent possible
data loss during
data upgrade.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

143
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

9____

If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review
the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection
window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the
reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each
report.
For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport,
CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy
CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and
CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales."
For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system.

10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm
files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of
the Web Engine.

Upgrade Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 143, you are now
ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system.
NOTE
The tasks that
appear in the Pre
Migration window
are based on the
version of your
data.

1____

From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities
menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and
company code for your version 4.00 or 4.05 system. Run the
reports and utilities that appear.
a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item
codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and
Transaction Detail files.


To fix the files, in your version 4.00 or 4.05 data, use
Inventory Management Main menu > Inventory
Maintenance.

b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the
quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data
files.


Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.



NOTE
The quantities in
your warehouse,
tier, and
transaction
inventory data
files must match
before you can
upgrade your
data to version
2014.

To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility.

c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory
quantities.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide



Run this utility for each warehouse.



At the Action column, select the action to perform for each
item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type.

144
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014



If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action
column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You
must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity.
After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these
valuation methods.



If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the
warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you
must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse
quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this
utility for those valuation methods.



For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in
the Help system.

d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure
corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail.
2____

If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to
upgrade your data.
If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014,
Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program
group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data.

3____

If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are
installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the
WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your
server.

4____

When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review
the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate
roles to your users using tasks accessed through the
Administrative Tools window.

5____

Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review
ODBC security if it is used.

6____

If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system
files, you must add the following statement on one workstation
SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes.

7____

If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the
Custom toolbar.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

145
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

Data Conversion Checklist
After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 143 and the
Upgrade Checklist on page 144, you are now ready to convert your data
to version 2014.
1____

If your company data contains credit card information, verify that
the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection
to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer
credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during
conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage
Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted.

2____

Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to
convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of
your companies.
If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to
a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To
Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This
window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the
credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test
results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed,
network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records
stored in your system.
You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card
transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears,
click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the
conversion process.
Additional time is required to convert company data after the
credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the
estimate shown on the window.

3____

Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities
menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the
placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See
Customizer Changes on page 47.
Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than
Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation,
eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material
Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise
Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order.

4____

If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups,
after converting to the new version of the software and prior to
accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu >
Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

146
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

5____

If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national
accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’
Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup
Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility
(select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales
order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s
address information.

6____

Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table
Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables
with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax
table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax
Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax
information is not updated.

7____

Test your customized Crystal reports and forms.

NOTE

If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and
forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare
your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in
version 2014.

Before modifying
the graphical
forms or reports
found on the
Custom Reports
menu, you must
be proficient in
the use of SAP
Crystal Reports.

To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU.
The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a
report or form. It does not provide information about formatting
changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth.
If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to
set them up using SAP Crystal Reports.
If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced
ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your
Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal
Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard
now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a
form or report.
If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting
Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP
Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more
information.
8____

If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports
menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them
using Report Manager.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

147
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

9____

If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or
export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will
need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost,
Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work
Order.
To determine if manual updates are required, review the
associated file layout information using the File Layouts and
Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop.
If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP,
review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual
Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are
consistent with the new file layouts.

10____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing
statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more
information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system.
11____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more
information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help
system.
12____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied
templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine.
Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to
the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web
service.
13____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax
Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options.
14____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter
default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign
Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules.
15____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all
customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption
number defined.
16____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File
menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. For
more information, See Custom Financials on page 91.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

148
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014

17____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the
bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During
conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number
in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in
Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in
Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code
Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct
Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is
entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes
are noted in the conversion log.
18____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the
ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the
upgrade process.
19____ Compare the following version 4.x and 2014 reports because
sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts
Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive
Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open
Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report.If you
purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after
setting up the data files for the first time, select Return
Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer
Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search
records in RMA.
20____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft
Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information
on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to
the Microsoft Download Center Web site.
21____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your
scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by
selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task
Scheduler, as applicable.
22____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your
Public and Private task folders.
23____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you
normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation
must have a default printer defined.
24____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each
Windows user who needs to access credit card information in
Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage
Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install
For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version
2014 on page 3.

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

149
Index
A
accounting dates 87
accounts 89
Accounts Payable
ACH payment 41
changes in product update 4.40.0.2 41
changes in version 2013 12
changes in version 4.20 70
data entry 71
enhancements in version 2014 4
expanded invoice number 12
global changes 70
inactive vendors 12
Invoice search button 4
period-end processing 71
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 41, 72
Repetitive Invoice search button 4
view cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance 14
wire transfers 41
Accounts Receivable
changes in version 2013 14
changes in version 4.10 78
changes in version 4.20 73
changes in version 4.30 65
changes in version 4.40 42
changes in version 4.50 27
credit card processing 16
enhancements in version 2014 4
global changes 78
inactive customers 14
national accounts 27
period-end processing 78
purge credit card data 28
recalculate utility 28
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 42, 79
Repetitive Invoice search button 4
split commission 28
utility 29
ACH electronic payments
viewing in Bank Reconciliation 18
activity log 38
Advanced Lookup Engine
changes in version 2013 10
changes in version 4.00 86
changes in version 4.20 67
changes in version 4.40 38
allocations 90
auto-complete 3

B
Bank Reconciliation
changes in product update 4.40.0.2 42
changes in product update 4.40.0.3 42
changes in version 2013 18
on the fly 42
registers 42
renamed and removed tasks 42
Bar Code
changes in version 4.40 43
changes in version 4.50 29
lot/serial distribution 29

Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

Bar Code (continued)
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 43
batch fax 68
Bill of Materials
changes in version 4.40 43
data entry 44
global changes 43
inquiry changes 44
options 43
printing 44
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 45
reports and forms 44
Business Insights
changes in version 4.00 89
changes in version 4.10 79
changes in version 4.20 73
changes in version 4.30 65
changes in version 4.40 45
global changes 73
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 73, 79
Business Insights Dashboard
changes in version 4.30 65
renamed tasks 73
Business Insights Explorer 73
Business Insights Explorer, changes in version 4.20 73
Business Insights Reporter 45
changes in version 4.00 89
changes in version 4.30 65

C
Cash Receipts Entry
inactive customers 15
Changes in version 2013
Common Information 18
Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance
inactive vendors 13
checklists
version 2013 data conversion 98, 104
version 2013 pre-upgrade 96, 102
version 2013 upgrade 97, 103
version 4.0 or 4.05 data conversion 146
version 4.0 or 4.05 pre-upgrade 143
version 4.0 or 4.05 upgrade 144
version 4.10 data conversion 139
version 4.10 pre-upgrade 136
version 4.10 upgrade 137
version 4.20 data conversion 131
version 4.20 pre-upgrade 128
version 4.20 upgrade 129
version 4.30 data conversion 123
version 4.30 pre-upgrade 120
version 4.30 upgrade 121
version 4.40 data conversion 115
version 4.40 pre-upgrade 113
version 4.40 upgrade 114
version 4.45 data conversion 109
version 4.45 pre-upgrade 108
version 4.45 upgrade 108
checks, cleared date 18

150
Index D
commission
by customer 28
by line item 35
Common Information 45
changes in product update 4.40.0.2 45
Changes in version 2013 18
changes in version 4.10 79
changes in version 4.20 74
changes in version 4.30 65
changes in version 4.40 46
options 46
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 46, 65, 74
reports 74
companies, copying data 88
costing changes 51
Credit Card Processing
related changes in Accounts Receivable 16
related changes in Sales Order 24
credit card related changes
A/R Period End Processing 16
Accounts Receivable Options 16
Administrative Tools 23
Company Maintenance 22
Credit Card Audit Log 23
Customer Credit Card Maintenance 17
Customer Maintenance 17
Payment Type Maintenance 16
reports 18
Role Maintenance 23
S/O Invoice Data Entry 24
Sales Order Entry 24
User Maintenance 23
credit cards
batch processing 16, 24
data storage 16, 19
swiping 16, 24
CRM Activity Log 20
CRM Company Options 20
CRM Options 20
CRM Server Options 20
custom reports 3
Customer Credit Card Maintenance
credit card related changes 17
Customer Maintenance
Card ID field 17
Customer Status field 14
inactive customers 14
Inactive Reason field 14
Temporary check box 14
customer numbers, expanded 39
Customer Relationship Management
automatically installed 20
changes in version 2013 20
multi-company integration with Sage CRM 20
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 21
customized Crystal forms 38
Customizer
changes in version 4.00 89
changes in version 4.10 80
changes in version 4.20 74
changes in version 4.40 47
global changes 47, 74, 80, 89

Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

D
data dictionaries 61, 85, 93
data dictionary listing 61, 77, 85, 93
data entry
General Ledger 91
in version 4.40 39
Sales Order 59
Data File Display and Maintenance 87
data file multi-segment 37
dates, accounting and module 87
Desktop 39, 67, 86
dot matrix printers 68

E
eBusiness Manager
changes in version 4.10 82
changes in version 4.40 48
global changes 82
Sage Web Engine 48
Electronic Reporting
changes in version 4.20 75
global changes 75
e-mail
encrypt with SMTP
e-mail statements, setup 65
Enhancements in version 2014
Accounts Payable 4
Accounts Receivable 4
General Ledger 4
global 3
Payroll 7
Sage CRM 6
Sage Intelligence Reporting 5
expanded
customer numbers 39
invoice number 12
item codes 39
export jobs 94

F
fax, batch faxing 68
Fixed Assets
changes in version 4.20 76
global changes 76

G
General Ledger
changes in version 4.00 89
changes in version 4.40 48
custom financials 91
data entry 91
enhancements in version 2014 4
Keep Financial Reports Window Open 4
period-end processing 92
renamed and removed tasks 93
reports 93
standard financials 91

151
Index H
global changes
in version 2013 10
in version 4.00 86
in version 4.20 67
in version 4.30 64
in version 4.40 37
in version 4.50 26
printing in version 4.40 39
reports and forms in version 4.40 40
Global Enhancements in version 2013
Microsoft Windows Installer 11
Sage Advisor 11
SData 10
Global enhancements in version 2013
Advanced Lookup Engine 10
graphic conventions 2

H
Help system 10, 67, 86

I
Import Job Maintenance 61, 77, 85, 93
import jobs in Payroll 32
imported, ODB files 43
inactive customers
Cash Receipts Entry 15
Customer Maintenance 14
excluding from listings and mailing labels 15
Inactive Reason Code Maintenance 18
Inactive Reason Code Maintenance 15, 18
inactive vendors 12
Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance 13
Invoice Payment Selection 13
inquiries 67
installation changes
in version 4.00 86
in version 4.30 64
in version 4.40 37
installation, Microsoft Windows Installer 11
installation, parallel or in-place 26
inventory items, on the fly 60
Inventory Management
changes in 4.50 29
changes in version 2013 22
changes in version 4.40 48
costing 51
global changes 49
item quantities 22
lot/serial distribution 30
options 49
period-end processing 51
physical count 50
printing 52
product lines 50
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 52
reports and forms 52
transactions 50
utilities 51
Invoice Payment Selection
inactive vendors 13

Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

Invoice Search button
A/P Invoice Data Entry 4
A/P Repetitive Invoice Entry 4
A/R Invoice Data Entry 4
item codes, expanded 39
Item Maintenance 50
item quantities 22
item pricing by total quantity 35
item quantities 22

J
Job Cost
changes in version 4.40 53
dictionary changes 53
options 53
job import changes in version 4.30 66

L
Library Master
changes in 4.50 30
changes in version 2013 22
changes in version 4.00 87
changes in version 4.20 68
changes in version 4.30 64
changes in version 4.40 40
credit card security 30
renamed, removed, or moved 88
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 23, 40
lot/serial distribution
sales orders 36

M
Manage Your System 27
manuals 67, 86
memos 73
Microsoft Windows Installer 11
migrate, Level 3.x data 86
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance 79
module option
add and edit credit card information 23
Module PDFs 25
modules
dates 87
registering 87
retired 63, 77, 94
MSI 11

N
national accounts 27
New Report window, Report Type field 8

O
Operand field 64

152
Index P

P
Paperless Office
changes in version 2013 24
Payroll
changes in 4.50 31
changes in product update 4.40.0.5 54
changes in version 4.20 76
changes in version 4.30 66
changes in version 4.40 54
deduction options 31
direct deposit 66
enhancements in version 2014 7
import jobs 32
imports 32
recalculate deductions 31
reports 77
taxes 76
PCCharge 19
PEP 26
period-end processing, General Ledger 92
physical count changes 50
printer, report and form setting 27
printing 68
Product Enhancement Program 26
Purchase Order
auto generate options 33
changes in version 4.40 54
changes in version 4.50 33
data entry 33, 56
global changes 54
options 55
period-end processing 57
printing 57
purchases history 56
registers and updates 58
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 33, 58
reports and forms 58
utilities 56

Q
Quarterly 941 Printing 54
Quick Order Entry 21

R
Remove Inactive Customers utility 15
Report Manager, new reports 8
Report Master
changes in version 4.30 66
changes in version 4.40 63
reports
e-mailing 10
General Ledger 93
global 64
SAP Crystal Reports 87
retired modules
in version 2013 25
in version 2014 9
in version 4.00 94
in version 4.20 77
in version 4.40 63

Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

retired modules (continued)
in version 4.50 36
RMA
changes in version 4.10 82
changes in version 4.40 59
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 59, 82
roles, maintaining 64

S
Sage 100 ERP Desktop 39, 67, 86
Sage Advisor 11
Sage CRM
enhancements in version 2014 6
multi-company integration 20
Quick Order Entry 21
Sage Exchange 16, 19
Sage Exchange Vault-only account 19
Sage Intelligence Reporting
enhancements in version 2014 5
Sage Web Engine 48
sales history 83
Sales Order
changes in 4.50 34
changes in product update 4.40.0.1 59
changes in version 2013 24
changes in version 4.10 83
changes in version 4.40 60
data entry 36, 59, 60
duplicate purchase order numbers 59
global changes 83
item pricing 35
job cost integration 84
job cost options 34
line item commission 35
lot/serial distribution 35
period-end processing 84
picking sheets 60
quick print options 59
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 60
reports 60, 83
SData 10
Search Grid window 3
security
credit card 30
in version 4.00 87
in version 4.50 26
requirement 26
Role Maintenance 40
roles 64
security event
override credit card information 23
selection grids 64
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, see SMTP
SMTP e-mail authentication in Paperless Office 24

U
URL, maintaining 70
utility, recalculate amounts 28, 29

153
Index V

V
Value field 64
Vault-only account, see Sage Exchange Vault-only account
Vendor Maintenance
inactive vendors 12
view cleared checks 14
vendors, make inactive 12
view cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance 14
Visual Integrator
changes in version 2013 25
changes in version 4.00 93
changes in version 4.10 85
changes in version 4.20 77
changes in version 4.30 66
changes in version 4.40 61
data dictionaries 61, 66, 77, 85, 93
Visual Process Flows
changes in version 2013 25
Visual Process Flows Manager 25

W
W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes 9
Web Reports Server 22
Work Order
changes in version 4.40 62
file layouts 62
renamed, removed, or moved tasks 62

Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide

154

More Related Content

PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Adminstrator's Guide
PDF
Sage 300 erp 2014 release guide march 2015 from BTC-ME
PDF
Whats new
PDF
SAP Business One; Step-by-Step Guide for Installation, configuration on Virtu...
PDF
SAP Business One Integration Problems and Solutions - DI server DI API B1WS
PDF
ArcSight Management Center 2.0 Release Notes
PDF
Oracle eBusiness and Middleware
PDF
Autodesk Technical Webinar: SAP Business One
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Adminstrator's Guide
Sage 300 erp 2014 release guide march 2015 from BTC-ME
Whats new
SAP Business One; Step-by-Step Guide for Installation, configuration on Virtu...
SAP Business One Integration Problems and Solutions - DI server DI API B1WS
ArcSight Management Center 2.0 Release Notes
Oracle eBusiness and Middleware
Autodesk Technical Webinar: SAP Business One

What's hot (19)

DOCX
Clients in sap
PDF
SAP B1 mobile setup-sandeep rathod
PDF
HPE - Additional license authorizations
PPTX
Microsoft dynamics crm 2011 installation
PPTX
01_Team_03_CS_591_Project
PDF
SUSE Technical Webinar: Build B1 apps in the Framework of the SAP and SUSE Ca...
DOCX
Assessing share point_server_licensing
PDF
Sql server 2012_licensing_reference_guide
PDF
Sage 100c 2016 Product Brochure
PPTX
SAP Business One Cloud
DOC
What is sap client
PDF
System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Administration Guide
PDF
assurx-services-brochure
PDF
Getting startedwithtallydeveloper9 | Tally Synchronisation | Tally Services |...
PPTX
Tips on setting up an eCcommerce web site using istore
PDF
121ontapi
PDF
Microsoft Dynamics CRM - Plug in User Guide
PPTX
KVP Corporate presentation-2012
PDF
SAP #BOBJ #BI 4.1 Upgrade Webcast Series 6: User Authentication and SSO
Clients in sap
SAP B1 mobile setup-sandeep rathod
HPE - Additional license authorizations
Microsoft dynamics crm 2011 installation
01_Team_03_CS_591_Project
SUSE Technical Webinar: Build B1 apps in the Framework of the SAP and SUSE Ca...
Assessing share point_server_licensing
Sql server 2012_licensing_reference_guide
Sage 100c 2016 Product Brochure
SAP Business One Cloud
What is sap client
System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Administration Guide
assurx-services-brochure
Getting startedwithtallydeveloper9 | Tally Synchronisation | Tally Services |...
Tips on setting up an eCcommerce web site using istore
121ontapi
Microsoft Dynamics CRM - Plug in User Guide
KVP Corporate presentation-2012
SAP #BOBJ #BI 4.1 Upgrade Webcast Series 6: User Authentication and SSO
Ad

Similar to Sage 100 ERP 2014 Upgrade Guide (20)

PDF
Sage100 2016 Customer Upgrade Guide
PDF
What's New in Sage 100 ERP 2015 (Guide)
PDF
Whats new-sage-100-erp-2015-release-guide
PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2015 Enhancements
PDF
Sage Business Vision 2014 Whats New
PPTX
What's New in Sage 100 ERP: A Review of the Latest Features in v2013, What's ...
PDF
What's New In Sage 100 ERP 2015
PDF
What's New In Sage 100 ERP 2015
PDF
Sage 300 erp 2014 release guide march 2014
PDF
What's New in Sage 100 ERP 2015? A Look at the Recent Product Enhancements in...
PDF
Introducing Sage 100 Version 2016 - A Look at the New Release
PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Product Update 6 Release Notes
PDF
Whats new2014 sage 100 erp [compatibility mode]
PDF
Get the Most Out of Sage 500
PPTX
Al 2012 Sage 300 ERP Roadmap
PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2015 What's New Agenda
PDF
Sage 100 2018 and Beyond
PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2013 Product Update 7 Release Notes
PDF
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Product Update 3 Release Notes
PPTX
Why should you upgrade sage 500 ERP 2017
Sage100 2016 Customer Upgrade Guide
What's New in Sage 100 ERP 2015 (Guide)
Whats new-sage-100-erp-2015-release-guide
Sage 100 ERP 2015 Enhancements
Sage Business Vision 2014 Whats New
What's New in Sage 100 ERP: A Review of the Latest Features in v2013, What's ...
What's New In Sage 100 ERP 2015
What's New In Sage 100 ERP 2015
Sage 300 erp 2014 release guide march 2014
What's New in Sage 100 ERP 2015? A Look at the Recent Product Enhancements in...
Introducing Sage 100 Version 2016 - A Look at the New Release
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Product Update 6 Release Notes
Whats new2014 sage 100 erp [compatibility mode]
Get the Most Out of Sage 500
Al 2012 Sage 300 ERP Roadmap
Sage 100 ERP 2015 What's New Agenda
Sage 100 2018 and Beyond
Sage 100 ERP 2013 Product Update 7 Release Notes
Sage 100 ERP 2014 Product Update 3 Release Notes
Why should you upgrade sage 500 ERP 2017
Ad

More from 90 Minds Consulting Group (20)

PDF
Sage Global Partner Program Set For Late 2017 Rollout
PDF
Sage Summit 2016
PDF
Meeting of the Minds 2016 Conference Guide
PDF
Sage 100 Tax Table Update 2016 Q1
PDF
90 Minds Affiliate Membership Options
PDF
Sage ERP X3 Technology And Architecture
PDF
Sage Payments Apple Pay FAQ
PDF
Sage 100 ERP ACA Reporting Worksheet
PDF
Meeting Of The Minds 2015 Agenda
PDF
Sage 100 ERP IRD for 2014
PDF
Guide To Sage 100 ERP 2014 eFiling
PDF
Sage Payment Services Test Account Request Form
PDF
Job Ops 2014 R1 Release Notes
PDF
Job Ops 2014 R1 User Guide
PDF
Sage 100 ERP Tax Table Updates - Q3 2014
PDF
Sage 100 ERP (MAS90) Web Services Manual
PDF
FRX Version 6.7 User Manual and Guide
PDF
Sage 100 Tax Table Update - 3/28/14
PDF
90 Minds Meeting of The Minds 2014 Agenda
PDF
PWC Global 100 Software Leaders
Sage Global Partner Program Set For Late 2017 Rollout
Sage Summit 2016
Meeting of the Minds 2016 Conference Guide
Sage 100 Tax Table Update 2016 Q1
90 Minds Affiliate Membership Options
Sage ERP X3 Technology And Architecture
Sage Payments Apple Pay FAQ
Sage 100 ERP ACA Reporting Worksheet
Meeting Of The Minds 2015 Agenda
Sage 100 ERP IRD for 2014
Guide To Sage 100 ERP 2014 eFiling
Sage Payment Services Test Account Request Form
Job Ops 2014 R1 Release Notes
Job Ops 2014 R1 User Guide
Sage 100 ERP Tax Table Updates - Q3 2014
Sage 100 ERP (MAS90) Web Services Manual
FRX Version 6.7 User Manual and Guide
Sage 100 Tax Table Update - 3/28/14
90 Minds Meeting of The Minds 2014 Agenda
PWC Global 100 Software Leaders

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
CIFDAQ's Market Insight: SEC Turns Pro Crypto
PDF
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PDF
Shreyas Phanse Resume: Experienced Backend Engineer | Java • Spring Boot • Ka...
PPTX
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
PDF
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
PDF
Bridging biosciences and deep learning for revolutionary discoveries: a compr...
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PPTX
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
PPTX
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PDF
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
DOCX
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
PPTX
Detection-First SIEM: Rule Types, Dashboards, and Threat-Informed Strategy
PDF
NewMind AI Monthly Chronicles - July 2025
CIFDAQ's Market Insight: SEC Turns Pro Crypto
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
Shreyas Phanse Resume: Experienced Backend Engineer | Java • Spring Boot • Ka...
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
Bridging biosciences and deep learning for revolutionary discoveries: a compr...
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
Detection-First SIEM: Rule Types, Dashboards, and Threat-Informed Strategy
NewMind AI Monthly Chronicles - July 2025

Sage 100 ERP 2014 Upgrade Guide

  • 1. Sage 100 ERP Customer Upgrade Guide
  • 2. This is a publication of Sage Software, Inc. Version 2014 Copyright © 2013 Sage Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Sage, the Sage logos, and the Sage product and service names mentioned herein are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sage Software, Inc., or its affiliated entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Business Objects® and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects®, and Crystal Reports® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. in the United Sates and in other countries. Business Objects is an SAP company. Microsoft® and Microsoft SQL Server® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or in other countries. The names of all other products and services are property of their respective owners. Your use of this document and the Sage product(s) described herein is governed by the terms and conditions of the Sage End User License Agreement ("EULA") or other agreement that is provided with or included in the Sage product. Nothing in this document supplements, modifies or amends those terms and conditions. Except as expressly stated in those terms and conditions, the information in this document is provided by Sage "AS IS" and Sage disclaims all express, implied or statutory warranties of any kind, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or of non-infringement. No implied license is granted to you under any Sage intellectual property or trade secret right. Sage reserves the right to revise, supplement or remove information in this document at any time without notice to you or others. Sage End User License: http://na.sage.com/sage-na/eula Rev 11
  • 3. Contents Chapter 1 — Introduction 1 How to Use This Guide 1 Enhancements 1 Graphic Conventions 2 Text Conventions 2 Chapter 2 — What's New in Version 2014 3 Global Enhancements 3 Auto-Complete 3 Custom Reports 3 Default Column Name in Search Grid Window 3 Accounts Payable Enhancements 4 Invoice List Button in Invoice Data Entry 4 Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry 4 Accounts Receivable Enhancements 4 Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry 4 General Ledger Enhancements 4 Keep Financial Reports Window Open 4 Sage Intelligence Reporting 5 Installation 5 Access within Sage 100 ERP 5 Excel 2010 64-Bit Support 5 .NET Framework 4.0 5 User Interface and Usability Improvements 5 Sage CRM 6 Payroll 7 Chapter 3 — Workflow Changes in 2014 8 Global 8 User Logon Window 8 MAS Office Button 8 Accounts Payable 8 Form 1099 Filing 8 Library Master 8 Report Manager 8 System Configuration 8 User Maintenance 8 Payroll 9 Electronic Form Filing 9 W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes 9 Retired Modules 9 Chapter 4 — Workflow Changes in 2013 10 Global Changes 10 64-Bit ODBC Driver 10 ALE Lookups in Data Entry Windows 10 Feedback Form in Help System 10 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide i
  • 4. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Installation Changes 10 Native SData Provider 10 Report Changes 10 SAP® Crystal Reports® 11 Sage Advisor Update 11 Installing with Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI) 11 Verify Account Information 11 Accounts Payable Changes 12 Expanded Accounts Payable Invoice Number 12 Inactive Vendors 12 View Cleared Checks in Vendor Maintenance 14 Accounts Receivable Changes 14 Inactive Customers 14 Credit Card Processing 16 Bank Reconciliation Changes 18 Common Information Changes 18 Credit Card Processing Changes 19 PCCharge 19 Customer Relationship Management Changes 20 Automatic Installation of Module 20 Use of Sage 100 ERP License 20 Multiple-company Integration with Sage CRM 20 Quick Order Entry 21 Inventory Management Changes 22 Library Master Changes 22 Credit Card Processing 22 Paperless Office Changes 24 Sales Order Changes 24 Credit Card Processing 24 Visual Integrator Changes 25 Visual Process Flows 25 Retired Modules 25 Module PDFs 25 Chapter 5 — Workflow Changes in 4.50 26 Global Changes 26 Choose an Installation Option 26 Security Requirement 26 Participate in the Product Enhancement Program 26 Retain Report and Form Printer Information Setting 27 Manage Your System Window 27 Accounts Receivable Changes 27 Create National Accounts 27 Define Default Price Levels by Customer and Product Line 28 Purge Credit Card Data During Period-End Processing 28 Define Split Commissions by Customer 28 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide ii
  • 5. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Recalculate Open Order Amounts 29 Bar Code Changes 29 Print Lot/Serial Distribution Information 29 Inventory Management Changes 29 Inactive Items 29 View Lot/Serial Distribution Information 30 Library Master Changes 30 Define Credit Card Security Options 30 Payroll Changes 31 Recalculate Deductions in Payroll Data Entry 31 Define Deduction Code Options 31 Recalculate All Option for Payroll Imports 32 Select Preconfigured Payroll Import Jobs 32 Define Minimum Hours for Benefit Accrual 32 Identify Business Type 32 Purchase Order Changes 33 Renamed Task 33 View Sales Orders from Purchase Order Entry 33 Set Up Additional Purchase Order/Auto Generate Options 33 Sales Order Changes 34 Set Up Additional Options for Job Cost 34 Calculate Sales Commissions by Line Item 35 Calculate Item Pricing by Total Quantity 35 Distribute Lot/Serial Items from Sales Order Entry 35 Generate Purchase Orders from Sales Orders 36 Assign Vendors to Miscellaneous/Special Items 36 Retired Modules 36 Chapter 6 — Workflow Changes in 4.40.0.X 37 Installation Changes 37 Changes in Version 4.40 37 Global Changes 37 Changes in Version 4.40 37 Library Master Changes 40 Changes in Version 4.40 40 Accounts Payable Changes 41 Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.2 41 Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 41 Change in Version 4.40 42 Accounts Receivable Changes 42 Change in Version 4.40 42 Bank Reconciliation Changes 42 Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.3 42 Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 42 Bar Code Changes 43 Changes in Version 4.40 43 Bill of Materials Changes 43 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide iii
  • 6. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Changes in Version 4.40 43 Business Insights Changes 45 Changes in Version 4.40 45 Common Information Changes 45 Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 45 Changes in Version 4.40 46 Customizer Changes 47 Changes in Version 4.40 47 eBusiness Manager Changes 48 Changes in Version 4.40 48 General Ledger Changes 48 Changes in Version 4.40 48 Inventory Management Changes 48 Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.5 48 Changes in Version 4.40 49 Job Cost Changes 53 Changes in Version 4.40 53 Payroll Changes 54 Change in Product Update 4.40.0.5 54 Change in Version 4.40 54 Purchase Order Changes 54 Changes in Version 4.40 54 Return Merchandise Authorization Changes 59 Change in Version 4.40 59 Sales Order Changes 59 Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 59 Changes in Version 4.40 60 Visual Integrator Changes 61 Changes in Version 4.40 61 Work Order Changes 62 Changes in Version 4.40 62 Report Master Changes 63 Changes in Version 4.40 63 Retired Modules 63 Chapter 7 — Workflow Changes in 4.30 64 Installation Changes 64 Global Changes 64 Reports and Forms 64 Selection Grids 64 Library Master Changes 64 Role Maintenance 64 Accounts Receivable Changes 65 Customer Statements 65 Business Insights Changes 65 Business Insights Dashboard 65 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide iv
  • 7. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Business Insights Reporter 65 Common Information Changes 65 Bank Code Maintenance 65 Payroll Changes 66 Direct Deposits 66 Visual Integrator Changes 66 Job Import 66 Report Master Changes 66 Chapter 8 — Workflow Changes in 4.20 67 Global Changes 67 Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) 67 Desktop 67 Help System and Online Manuals 67 Inquiries 67 Printing 68 Printing to a Dot Matrix Printer 68 Report Master 68 Library Master Changes 68 Batch Faxing 68 Role Maintenance 69 Renamed Task 69 Reports 69 URL Maintenance 70 Accounts Payable Changes 70 Global Changes 70 Data Entry 71 Period End Processing 71 Reports and Forms 71 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 72 Accounts Receivable Changes 73 Memos 73 Business Insights Changes 73 Global Changes 73 Business Insights Explorer 73 Renamed Tasks 73 Common Information Changes 74 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 74 Customizer Changes 74 Global Changes 74 Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media Reporting) 75 Global Changes 75 Fixed Assets Changes 76 Global Changes 76 Payroll Changes 76 Taxes 76 Reports 77 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide v
  • 8. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Visual Integrator Changes 77 Data Dictionary Listing 77 Import Job Maintenance 77 Retired Modules 77 Chapter 9 — Workflow Changes in 4.10 78 Accounts Receivable Changes 78 Global Changes 78 Period End Processing 78 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 79 Business Insights Changes 79 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 79 Common Information Changes 79 Miscellaneous Item Maintenance 79 Customizer Changes 80 Global Changes 80 eBusiness Manager Changes 82 Global Changes 82 Return Merchandise Authorization Changes 82 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 82 Sales Order Changes 83 Global Changes 83 Sales History 83 Sales History Reports 83 Period End Processing 84 Job Cost Integration 84 Visual Integrator Changes 85 Data Dictionaries 85 Data Dictionary Listing 85 Import Job Maintenance 85 Chapter 10 — Workflow Changes in 4.00 86 Installation Changes 86 Global Changes 86 Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) 86 Desktop 86 Help System and Online Manuals 86 Upgrading Level 3.x Data 86 Module and Accounting Dates 87 Registering Your Modules 87 Security 87 Library Master Changes 87 Changed Tasks 87 Companies 88 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks 88 Business Insights Changes 89 Business Insights Reporter 89 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide vi
  • 9. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Customizer Changes 89 Global Changes 89 General Ledger Changes 89 Accounts 89 Allocations 90 Custom Financials 91 Standard Financials 91 Data Entry 91 Period End Processing 92 Reports 93 Renamed and Removed Tasks 93 Visual Integrator Changes 93 Data Dictionaries 93 Data Dictionary Listing 93 Import Job Maintenance 93 Export Jobs 94 Retired Modules 94 Appendix A — Checklists 95 Upgrade and Conversion Process 95 Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 96 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 96 Upgrade Checklist 97 Data Conversion Checklist 98 Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 102 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 102 Upgrade Checklist 103 Data Conversion Checklist 104 Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 108 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 108 Upgrade Checklist 108 Data Conversion Checklist 109 Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 113 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 113 Upgrade Checklist 114 Data Conversion Checklist 115 Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 120 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 120 Upgrade Checklist 121 Data Conversion Checklist 123 Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 128 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 128 Upgrade Checklist 129 Data Conversion Checklist 131 Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 136 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 136 Upgrade Checklist 137 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide vii
  • 10. Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Data Conversion Checklist 139 Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 143 Pre-Upgrade Checklist 143 Upgrade Checklist 144 Data Conversion Checklist 146 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide viii
  • 11. Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Sage, the recognized leader in business management for small- and mid-size businesses, welcomes you to Sage 100 ERP 2014. How to Use This Guide This guide has been created to ease the process of upgrading your software. While the extensive new features included in this release have been designed to improve your workflow and business processes, this means that the way you use your system may change. Chapter 2 of this guide contains all the enhancements for this release. The remaining chapters specifically highlight the differences that you need to be aware of and the steps you need to take before you begin using the new system so you can take better advantage of the improvements. The appendix provides pre-installation and post-installation checklists to ease the upgrade process. Review the information in this guide before installing the software. For more information, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's Guide. The Installation and System Administrator's Guide can be found in the Documents folder of the Sage 100 ERP installation program, or by selecting a product from the Autorun screen, and then clicking Documentation on the product screen. The guide is in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format and is named Sage100ERP_Install.pdf. Enhancements For a complete list of enhancements and changes to the software, after installing, refer to the What's New page and the Release Notices. For the What's New information, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. You can also access the What's New page by clicking What's New on the Desktop's Resources page. From the What's New page, click Release Notices to view the Release Notices. This guide contains the following information you need for a successful upgrade:  Installation changes  Global changes in the software  Changes to the modules  Pre-installation checklist  Post-installation checklist  Data conversion checklist Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 1
  • 12. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ How to Use This Guide Graphic Conventions The following icons are used throughout this guide to indicate different types of information. The NOTE symbol is followed by additional information about a topic. The WARNING symbol is followed by information to help you avoid costly mistakes. Text Conventions The following table describes the text conventions used in this guide. Text Convention Explanation Menus Menus are shown in this format: Select menu > menu task name. Examples:   Bold font Select File menu > Change Company. Select General Ledger Budget menu > Budget Maintenance. Indicates text entered at a field or text selected at a field. Examples:   Italic font At the Value field, type a search value, such as 01, for the lookup. In the Filter window, to delete a filter, select <none> at a filter's Column field. Indicates references to other manuals. Example:  Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide For more information, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's Guide. 2
  • 13. Chapter 2 What's New in Version 2014 Chapter 2 Global Enhancements Auto-Complete An auto-complete feature has been added for customer number, vendor number, and item code entry fields. You can now locate records by entering the customer name, vendor name, or item description in the respective field. As you type, a list of records matching your entry appears, and you can select a record from the list. For example, if you have vendors named United Airways, United Paper, and United Parcel Service, when you type united in the vendor number field, all three vendors will appear in a list, and you can select the one that you want. You can still select records by entering the customer number, vendor number, and item code. This feature is automatically enabled for all users. To disable the feature for all users, clear the Enable Auto-Complete check box in Library Master > System Configuration. You can also disable the feature for individual users in Library Master > User Maintenance. Custom Reports The following check boxes will now appear on custom report windows:  Keep Window Open After Print  Keep Window Open After Preview You can select these check boxes so that the windows do not automatically close after printing or previewing reports. Default Column Name in Search Grid Window To make searching easier when using the Search Grid window, the default value in the Column Name field is now the first column in the grid. For example, in Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry, when you click the Find Row button to open the Search Grid window, Check No. is now the default value in the Column Name field. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 3
  • 14. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Enhancements Accounts Payable Enhancements Invoice List Button in Invoice Data Entry An Invoice List button has been added to the Invoice Data Entry window. You can now click that button to view a list of all invoices in the data entry table. Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry A Repetitive Invoice List button has been added to the Repetitive Invoice Entry window. You can now click that button to view a list of all invoices in the data entry table. Accounts Receivable Enhancements Repetitive Invoice List Button in Repetitive Invoice Entry You no longer have to select a customer before selecting a repetitive invoice in Repetitive Invoice Entry. You can now click the Repetitive Invoices button to view and select from a list of repetitive invoices. General Ledger Enhancements Keep Financial Reports Window Open A Keep Window Open check box has been added to the Financial Reports window. If you select that check box, the Financial Reports window will no longer automatically close after clicking Proceed and then closing the Print Financial Reports window. Two check boxes have been added to the Print Financial Reports window:  Keep Window Open After Print  Keep Window Open After Preview You can now select these check boxes so that the window does not automatically close after printing or previewing reports. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 4
  • 15. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sage Intelligence Reporting Sage Intelligence Reporting NOTE Excel 2007, 2010, or 2013 is required to use the version of Sage Intelligence Reporting included with Sage 100 ERP 2014. Installation The Sage Intelligence Reporting installation program is now part of the Sage 100 ERP Workstation Setup program. Sage Intelligence Reporting is automatically installed when you run Workstation Setup and select the Typical installation option. Access within Sage 100 ERP Sage Intelligence Reporting is now accessed from the Sage 100 ERP Module Menus toolbar and the Tasks tab. Excel 2010 and Excel 2013 64-Bit Support Sage Intelligence Reporting is now compatible with the 64-bit version of Excel 2010 and Excel 2013. .NET Framework 4.0 Sage Intelligence Reporting has been upgraded to .NET Framework 4.0, resulting in smoother integration with Excel and faster installation time if .NET Framework 4.0 is already installed. User Interface and Usability Improvements Numerous enhancements were made to Sage Intelligence Reporting to make the product more efficient and easy to use. These improvements include the following: User Interface  Report Manager menu items have been reorganized to make commonly used features easier to find. The most commonly used items are grouped on the Home and Help tabs. Less frequently used items are grouped on the File and Tools tabs.  Connector menu items have been reorganized; more commonly used items are now available on the File, Home, and Help tabs. Less commonly used features are now on the Tools tab.  The locked report screen and the Unlock on Copy screen have been updated to display information in a more user-friendly manner. Report Designer  The new Report Designer Add-in gives you better control over reporting layouts. You can now break reports into reusable pieces and reassemble them in different configurations to create new reports.  You can now maximize the Report Designer window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 5
  • 16. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sage CRM  Rows and columns are now ordered alphabetically, and they are easier to rearrange. Also, larger fonts are now used, and the row and column placeholder bars within the selected row and column layout are now wider to accommodate longer field names.  You can now insert column or row fields at a specific location within your layout instead of inserting it at the end of the column or row and then moving it.  Text columns added to a layout are now automatically resized based on their content.  You can now add and delete row reporting groups from within the Mapping Tool. Report Manager  The columns that appear in Report Manager when a report is selected are now automatically resized so that all text with the columns is visible.  When importing a report that includes a container with the same name as an existing container, you can now rename the container to avoid having two containers with the same name.  The right-click menus have been simplified and more intuitive labels have been added. The options that have been removed are still available on the Report Manager Ribbon. Report Viewer  The Report Viewer now remains open after running a report.  A minimum window size has been set for the Report viewer so that all available reports are visible. Sage CRM Sage CRM customization has been enhanced to take advantage of the new features in Sage CRM 7.2. For more information, review the Sage CRM 7.2 Installation and Upgrade Guide. To access this guide, click the Documentation link on the Sage CRM 7.2 for Sage 100 ERP 2014 Autorun screen. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 6
  • 17. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Payroll Employer Medical Assistance Contribution (MAC) fields have been added to P/R Tax Table Maintenance. The fields appear when Massachusetts is entered in the State field. You can enter a rate for the Employer MAC, but the accrual account, limit, and limit type fields display what you have entered for the unemployment tax and can only be viewed. The Employer MAC amount is included with the unemployment tax on the Employer’s Expense Summary, but it is separated into its own column on the Quarterly Tax Report. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 7
  • 18. Chapter 3 Workflow Changes in 2014 Chapter 3 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated into the product for the 2014 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module changes and retirements. Global MAS Office Button The MAS Office button has been removed from the Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, and Work Order modules. Accounts Payable Form 1099 Filing The Form 1099 eFiling and Reporting task, which is located on the Reports menu, is now the only option available for electronic filing of 1099 forms. The Electronic Reporting module has been retired. Library Master Report Manager The following fields have been removed from the New Report window that appears when creating a new report in Report Manager:  Report Type  Report Master Name By default, Crystal Report is the only available report type. System Configuration The Web Services tab has been renamed; it is now the Preferences tab. User Maintenance Two fields, Email and Job Title, have been added to the User Maintenance window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 8
  • 19. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Payroll Electronic Form Filing The Federal eFiling and Reporting and State eFiling and Reporting tasks, located on the Payroll Period End menu, are now the only options available for electronically filing payroll tax forms. The Electronic Reporting module has been retired. W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes The W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes task has been renamed W2 Puerto Rico Mapping Maintenance. Also, the task has been relocated to the Payroll Setup menu. The task was previously part of the Electronic Reporting module. Retired Modules The Electronic Reporting module has been retired. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 9
  • 20. Chapter 4 Workflow Changes in 2013 Chapter 4 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated into the product for the 2013 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module changes and retirements. Global Changes 64-Bit ODBC Driver A 64-bit ODBC driver, which allows third-party 64-bit applications to access Sage 100 ERP data, is now available. The installation program for the driver can be run from the Sage 100 ERP — Applications installation program. ALE Lookups in Data Entry Windows You can now select whether to display or hide inactive customers and vendors in some ALE lookups. These options can be selected in Company Maintenance. Feedback Form in Help System A feedback form has been added to all Help System topics. You can now indicate whether a topic is helpful and provide anonymous feedback that will be used to improve product documentation. Installation Changes When uninstalling Sage 100 ERP, your company data is no longer deleted. To remove the data, you must manually delete it from the MAS90 folder. Native SData Provider You can now use SData, an HTTP-based communication protocol, to communicate with the workstation, server, and web-based applications, as well as third-party applications and the World Wide Web. SData is enabled in System Configuration, and security is assigned by role for each user in Role Maintenance. Report Changes You can no longer e-mail report data when selecting the Export option in the Printer/Output field in report windows. For information on e-mailing a report using Paperless Office functionality, see E-mail, Fax, or Print a Report as a PDF in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 10
  • 21. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Global Changes SAP® Crystal Reports® SAP Crystal Reports 2011 is now included with Sage 100 ERP. Enhancements in version 2011 include a .NET runtime engine component, the ability to export directly to an Excel .xlsx file, Adobe Flash integration, built-in bar code support, and enhanced SAP Crystal Reports Designer features. Sage Advisor Update You can now keep your Sage products up to date with the latest releases and updates. Sage Advisor Update reviews the Sage products you have installed on your server and lists the online updates available for download. Sage Advisor Update is automatically installed and can be launched from your Program Files > Sage folder, and from the icon located in the system tray. For more information, see the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Installing with Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI) Sage 100 ERP is now installed using Microsoft Windows Installer (MSI). MSI will provide a single installation per version on your system; multiple instances cannot be installed. Verify Account Information You no longer have to enter information in the Verify Account Information window when verifying information for the following tasks:  1099 eFiling and Reporting  Federal eFiling and Reporting  State eFiling and Reporting The required information will automatically be transmitted when you click OK. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 11
  • 22. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes Accounts Payable Changes Expanded Accounts Payable Invoice Number  The invoice number field is now expanded to 20 characters, from 10 characters in previous releases.  Reports and listings now display the full invoice number while retaining the portrait orientation. Journals, register, updates, inquiries, lookups, explorer views, and data entry programs will also display the full invoice number.  The 20-character invoice number can be viewed in the Job Cost and General Ledger comments on reports.  The full invoice number will be printed on the check stubs. Inactive Vendors  In Vendor Maintenance, the Temporary check box has been replaced with a Vendor Status drop-down list that contains Active, Inactive, and Temporary statuses. The Inactive option allows you to prevent users from selecting inactive vendors in the following tasks:  Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance  A/P Invoice Data Entry  Manual Check and Payment Entry  A/P Repetitive Invoice Entry  Salesperson Maintenance  Item Maintenance  Job Masterfile Maintenance (for cost codes only)  Job Posting Entry (for direct costs only)  Purchase Order Entry  Receipt of Goods Entry  Receipt of Invoice Entry  Return of Goods Entry  RMA Entry  RMA Receipts Entry  Sales Order Entry  S/O Invoice Data Entry   AP from AR Clearing Entry  Work Order Transaction Entry (for outside processing charges only) A new field, Inactive Reason, has been added to the Additional tab in Vendor Maintenance. Use this field to add a reason code for an inactive vendor. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 12
  • 23. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes  A new Inactive Status Exception List window allows you to view and print a list of reasons why the vendor status cannot be changed to Inactive. You can also drill down to the source document, if applicable. This window appears after clicking Details if a message dialog box warns you that the vendor status cannot be changed.  A change to a vendor’s status will appear on the Vendor Audit Report if All or Changes is selected in the Vendor Changes to Track field on the History tab in Accounts Payable Options.  A security event has been added to allow the selection of inactive vendors in Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance and to allow the selection of inactive vendors’ invoices in Invoice Payment Selection.  You can now select to include or exclude inactive vendors from Vendor Listing, Vendor Listing with Balances, and Vendor Mailing Labels.  A new column, Status, has been added to some ALE vendor lookups. This field allows you to group and filter inactive, temporary, and active vendors.  A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to the Setup menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for inactive vendors. A pre-defined reason code, OUTOB (Out of Business), has been added and cannot be deleted. These reason codes are shared with the Accounts Receivable module for use with inactive customer records. The Inactive Reason Code Maintenance task is also available on the Accounts Receivable Setup menu and the Common Information Main menu.  A new utility, Remove Inactive Vendors, has been added to the Utilities menu. This utility allows you to delete inactive vendors.  In Vendor Maintenance, the Temporary Vendor check box has been replaced with a Vendor Status drop-down list and moved to the Additional tab. You can now select a status of Active, Inactive, or Temporary.  Active has now replaced Permanent as a vendor status. Any permanent vendors are converted to active vendors during data conversion. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 13
  • 24. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes View Cleared Checks in Vendor Maintenance  Two new fields have been added in Vendor Maintenance that will allow you to view check status information on checks that have cleared the bank in Bank Reconciliation. The ability to view the cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance can be enabled on the Main tab in Accounts Payable Options if the Accounts Payable module is integrated with Bank Reconciliation. Viewing cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance applies only to checks processed in version 2013 or higher.  You can now post ACH electronic payments in detail to the Bank Reconciliation module. This feature is enabled in Accounts Payable Options if Accounts Payable is integrated with Bank Reconciliation. Accounts Receivable Changes Inactive Customers  In Customer Maintenance, the Temporary check box has been replaced with a Customer Status drop-down list that contains Active, Inactive, and Temporary statuses. The Inactive option allows you to prevent users from selecting inactive customers in the following tasks:  AP from AR Clearing Entry  Cash Receipts Entry  Finance Charge Entry  A/R Invoice Data Entry  Repetitive Invoice Entry  User ID Maintenance  Job Billing Data Entry  Job Estimate Maintenance  Job Masterfile Maintenance (for open jobs only)  Material Requirements Planning  Maintain Projected Demands  RMA Entry  RMA Receipts Entry  S/O Invoice Data Entry  Sales Order Entry  A new field, Inactive Reason, has been added to the Additional tab in Customer Maintenance that allows you to add a reason code for the inactive customer.  A new Inactive Status Exception List window allows you to view and print a list of reasons why the customer status cannot be changed to Inactive. You can also drill down to the source document, if applicable. This window appears after clicking Details if a message dialog box warns you that the customer status cannot be changed. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 14
  • 25. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes  A change to a customer’s status will appear on the Customer Audit Report if All or Changes is selected in the Customer Changes to Track field on the History tab in Accounts Receivable Options.  A security event as been added to allow the entry of an inactive customer when adding a line in Cash Receipts Entry.  You can now select to include or exclude inactive customers from Statement Printing, Customer Listing, Customer Listing with Balances, and Customer Mailing Labels.  A new column, Status, has been added to some ALE customer lookups. This field allows you to group and filter inactive, temporary, and active customers.  A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to the Setup menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for inactive customers. Additionally, an OUTOB (Out of Business) pre-defined reason code has been added and cannot be deleted. These reason codes are shared with the Accounts Payable module for use with inactive vendor records. The Inactive Reason Code Maintenance task is also available on the Accounts Payable Setup menu and the Common Information Main menu.  A new utility, Remove Inactive Customers, has been added to the Utilities menu. This utility allows you to delete inactive customers.  In Customer Maintenance, the Temporary Customer check box has been replaced with a Customer Status drop-down list and moved to the Additional tab. You can now select a status of Active, Inactive, or Temporary.  Active has now replaced Permanent as a customer status. Any permanent customers are converted to active customers during data conversion. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 15
  • 26. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes Credit Card Processing You can now integrate with Sage Exchange to secure your customers’ credit card numbers in a Sage Exchange Vault account, which is a PCI-compliant location for storing sensitive credit card and banking information. For an overview of this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing Changes on page 19. Included in the numerous Accounts Receivable changes:  You can now process credit card transactions in A/R Invoice Data Entry.  In Repetitive Invoice Entry, you can store credit card transactions to be processed when the invoice is processed.  You can swipe credit cards for payment acceptance.  You can process credit card transactions in a batch.  You can view credit card payment information in the Payment Information window for a selected invoice.  Printed invoices now reflect credit card payments.  Because credit card numbers are no longer stored in Sage 100 ERP, the following fields have been removed:  The Purge Credit Card Data field in A/R Period End Processing  The Days to Retain Credit Card History field in Accounts Receivable Options (previously used in conjunction with the purging of credit card data during period end processing) The following sections list additional changes separated by task. Payment Type Maintenance  The Show Validation Code Verification and Show Address Verification check boxes have been combined and renamed Show Address and CVV Verification.  The Merchant ID field has been renamed Merchant Account.  The following fields have been added for entering Sage Exchange account information.    Virtual Terminal ID Merchant Key The following fields have been removed; the settings are now defined in Sage Exchange. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 16
  • 27. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes    Validation Code Length Require Validation Code The following PCCharge related fields have been removed:  Credit Card Processor Code  Processor Type Customer Maintenance  In Customer Maintenance, a Card ID field has been added to the Additional tab for entering a unique card ID number to identify credit card records. You can now add a credit card on the fly by typing a new card ID number in this field to launch Customer Credit Card Maintenance.  The CC Number field has been removed. Credit card numbers are now entered in the Sage Exchange Vault window, accessed from Customer Credit Card Maintenance.  The CC Pymt Type field has been renamed Payment Type. Customer Credit Card Maintenance  The Add New Card button has been added to open the Sage Exchange Vault window for adding a credit card number and expiration date.  The Edit Card button has been added to open the Sage Exchange Vault window for editing the expiration date of the current credit card record.  The CC Pymt Type field has been renamed Payment Type.  The Card Number field has been removed.  A Card ID field has been added, which allows you to enter a card ID number to identify a credit card.  The following view-only fields have been added; they display information for credit cards entered in the Sage Exchange Vault.  Card Type  Last Four Digits  The Expiration Date is now a view-only field; it displays the expiration date for the credit card number entered in the Sage Exchange Vault window.  The following fields have been added:  Address (second line) Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 17
  • 28. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Bank Reconciliation Changes  Country  E-mail Address Reports The Print Formatted Credit Card check box has been removed from the following Accounts Receivable report windows. The last four digits of the credit card number will still appear on the reports.  Customer Listing  Customer Credit Card Listing  Deposit Transaction Report Bank Reconciliation Changes  A new field, Cleared Date, has been added to all data entry tasks in this module. You can enter a date when the check has cleared the bank if the date is different than the module default date. The cleared date can be viewed in registers and reports when reconciling the bank statement. The field is available for inclusion in Auto Check Reconciliation check settings.  ACH electronic payments can now be listed in Reconcile Bank and Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry based on the selection made in Accounts Payable Options. If the option is selected, ACH payments will be listed on the Checks tab. If the option is cleared, one posting will be listed on the Dep/Adjust tab. Common Information Changes  A new task, Inactive Reason Code Maintenance, has been added to the Main menu. This task allows you to create reason codes for inactive customers and vendors. Additionally, an OUTOB (Out of Business) pre-defined reason code has been added and cannot be deleted. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 18
  • 29. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Credit Card Processing Changes Credit Card Processing Changes Integrated credit card processing is now available exclusively through Sage Sage Payment Solutions via Sage Exchange. PCCharge is no longer integrated with Sage 100 ERP. With Sage Exchange, credit card numbers are stored in the Sage Exchange Vault. Credit card numbers are no longer stored in Sage 100 ERP; only the last 4 digits are stored. Therefore, credit card encryption is no longer required in Sage 100 ERP. If credit card numbers were stored in the prior version of your software, and you were not processing transactions using Sage Exchange, the credit card numbers will be transferred into a Sage Exchange Vault-only account, which cannot be used for processing transactions. The Vault-only account is automatically created during data conversion, and it can be converted to a processing account. To convert the account, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive or your Sage business partner. For information on Accounts Receivable changes related to this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing on page 16. For information on Library Master changes related to this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing on page 22. For information on Sales Order changes related to this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing on page 24. PCCharge The Sage Payment Solutions Gateway does not recognize outstanding pre-authorizations performed with other processors that previously used PCCharge Payment Server. Sales are processed through Sage Exchange as though no pre-authorization was performed. The available credit for your customers is reduced by the pending pre-authorization amount until the date of pre-authorization expiration. WARNING Verify that any existing PCCharge credit card transactions have been updated to the general ledger. If you have existing PCCharge credit card transactions, verify that all transactions entered in Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry and Sales Order Invoice Data Entry have been updated to the general ledger. If you have existing PCCharge credit card transactions, print the Accounts Receivable Credit Card Settlement Report to balance the settlement batches for the PCCharge processor. PCCharge settlement data will no longer be included in the Credit Card Settlement Report. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 19
  • 30. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Customer Relationship Management Changes Customer Relationship Management Changes Automatic Installation of Module The Customer Relationship Management module is now automatically installed with Library Master and no longer has to be activated. Previously, you were required to install the module separately and activate it in Company Maintenance. Use of Sage 100 ERP License Launching a Sage 100 ERP task from Sage CRM no longer uses a Sage 100 ERP license. Multiple-company Integration with Sage CRM You can now integrate multiple Sage 100 ERP companies with one instance of Sage CRM, or you can continue using multiple instances of Sage CRM. If you were previously using multiple instances of Sage CRM for integration with multiple Sage 100 ERP companies, see the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. The following changes related to that enhancement have been made in the Customer Relationship Management module.  The CRM Options task as been replaced with two new tasks on the Customer Relationship Management Main menu: CRM Server Options and CRM Company Options.  Use CRM Server Options to define settings for each instance of Sage CRM.  Use CRM Company Options to define company-specific settings for each company linked to Sage CRM.  CRM Activity Log data can now be sorted and filtered by the Sage 100 ERP company code and Sage CRM instance ID.  When running the Purge CRM Activity Log utility, you can now purge data for a specified Sage 100 ERP company and Sage CRM instance ID or for all companies and instance IDs.  When running the Purge CRM Order/Quote Tracking utility, you can now purge data for a specified Sage 100 ERP company code or for all companies.  When generating the CRM Activity Log, you can now select data based on the Sage 100 ERP company code and Sage CRM instance ID. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 20
  • 31. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Customer Relationship Management Changes  A Sage 100 ERP Company Code field has been added to the following windows, which are accessed from Sage CRM.  Create New Sage CRM Quote  Create New Sage CRM Order  Create Relationship  Maintain Relationship  Promote Company to Customer  The CRM Country Maintenance task has been renamed CRM Country Cross Reference Maintenance.  When creating a sales order or quote within Sage CRM, a Sage 100 ERP company must now be selected. Quick Order Entry In Sage 100 Advanced and Premium ERP, you can now install and use Quick Order Entry to enter and edit sales orders and quotes in Sage CRM. This task has the essential fields and functionality available in Sales Order Entry. Some fields and functionality have been omitted to streamline the data entry process. Orders and quotes can be printed to PDF and sent as e-mail attachments from Quick Order Entry. The location for storing the PDF files and the URL for viewing them are entered in the Reports Folder and Reports Portal fields in CRM Company Options. You can elect to use either Quick Order Entry or the standard Sales Order Entry window by selecting an option in the Default Form for Quotes/Orders field on the ERP Preferences tab in Sage CRM. You must have the appropriate security set up in Sage 100 ERP to access the new window. For information on installing Quick Order Entry, see the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 21
  • 32. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Inventory Management Changes Inventory Management Changes In Item Maintenance, a Quantities grid has been added to the Main tab. The grid allows you to view the quantity detail information for the selected item and all warehouses. You can click the Quantity Recap button to view a recap for all warehouses or the selected warehouse. Additionally, the following fields have been moved to the Additional tab to accommodate the Quantities grid.  Allow Back Orders  Allow Trade Discounts  Allocate Landed Cost  Inactive Item Library Master Changes Web Reports Server The Web Reports Server Name field and the Web Reports Virtual Directory field have been removed from Company Maintenance. Web Reports Server is no longer supported. Credit Card Processing Several changes were made as part of the credit card enhancements. The following sections list these changes separated by task. Company Maintenance The following credit card related changes have been made in Company Maintenance:  The Servers tab has been renamed to Credit Cards tab.  The Enable Credit Card Payment Server field has been replaced with the Enable Credit Card Processing check box; selecting this check box enables credit card processing through Sage Exchange.  The Enable Batch Authorizations check box has been replaced with the Default Transactions to Process in Batch check box. If this check box is selected, credit cards are batch processed by default in Accounts Receivable and Sales Order. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 22
  • 33. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes  The following PCCharge related fields have been removed:  Use Default Server Settings  IP Address  Port  Path  Force Reconnect for Each Authorization  Two new fields, Vault-Only ID and Vault-Only Key, will appear on the Credit Cards tab if a Vault-Only account is created to store credit card numbers. The ID and key will automatically be entered in these fields.  The Credit Card Encryption button has been removed. User Maintenance The following check boxes have been removed from the Preferences tab:  Display Formatted Credit Card  Print Formatted Credit Card Role Maintenance  A security event has been added to allow users to override the credit card information for Accounts Receivable and Sales Order credit memos.  A module option has been added that allows users to add new credit card numbers and edit the expiration date for existing credit card numbers on file. The following security events have been removed:  Allow Access to Credit Card Encryption in Company Maintenance  Allow Deleting of Public Key  Allow Purging of Credit Card Audit Log Credit Card Audit Log Credit Card Audit Log has been removed from the Library Master Reports menu. Administrative Tools The Change Credit Card Encryption Key Phrase button has been removed from the Administrative Tools window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 23
  • 34. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Paperless Office Changes Paperless Office Changes You can now use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) authentication to send e-mail messages. This includes Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) mail services to encrypt the communication between the client and server and protect sensitive company information. This option can be enabled in Company Maintenance. Sales Order Changes Credit Card Processing You can now integrate with Sage Exchange to secure your customers’ credit card numbers in a Sage Exchange Vault account, which is a PCI-compliant location for storing sensitive credit card and banking information. For an overview of this enhancement, see Credit Card Processing Changes on page 19. The following changes were made as part of the credit card processing enhancement:  You can now swipe credit cards for payment acceptance.  Credit cards transactions can now be processed in a batch.  Printed sales orders and invoices now reflect credit card payments. The following sections describe additional changes separated by task. Sales Order Entry  You can now obtain a pre-authorization for an amount that is greater or less than the order amount.  The Payment Type field on the Totals tab has been renamed Deposit Payment Type to avoid confusion with the Payment Type field on the Credit Card tab.  The Deposit check box, Credit Card Number field, and Credit Card Information button have been removed from the Totals tab. S/O Invoice Data Entry  The Payment Type field on the Totals tab has been renamed Deposit Payment Type to avoid confusion with the Payment Type field on the Credit Card tab.  The Deposit check box, Credit Card Number field, and Credit Card Information button have been removed from the Totals tab. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 24
  • 35. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Visual Integrator Changes Visual Integrator Changes The option to export fully formatted credit card numbers has been removed from the Export Job window. Visual Process Flows Visual process flows are interactive workflow diagrams that show the steps to complete a task or process. Elements on the process flows are linked to Sage 100 ERP tasks; clicking an element starts the linked task. Other actions, such as showing or hiding objects on the process flow, can also be assigned to elements. Seven predefined process flows are available on the Visual Process Flows submenus. You can use these predefined process flows as templates to create your own customized process flows, which appear on the Custom Process Flows menu in the applicable modules. The Visual Process Flows Manager task, located on the Visual Process Flows Setup menu, allows you to create, copy, and delete custom process flows, modify their settings, and open them in the Visual Process Flow Designer. Internet Explorer version 8 or higher and Adobe Flash Player are required to use the process flows. Retired Modules The Business Alerts Professional module has been retired as of version 2013. Module PDFs The Module PDFs that contained the overview topics for Sage 100 ERP tasks are no longer accessed in the Help system; they are now accessed through the Resources page on the Desktop. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 25
  • 36. Chapter 5 Workflow Changes in 4.50 Chapter 5 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.50 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module changes and retirements. Global Changes Choose an Installation Option You now have the option to perform an in-place or parallel upgrade installation. If you select to perform a parallel upgrade, use the Parallel Migration wizard to move your data. An in-place installation can only be performed for version 4.40. The following products are now available on one DVD:         Sage 100 Standard ERP Sage 100 Advanced ERP Sage 100 Premium ERP Sage CRM eBusiness Manager eBusiness Web Services Federal and State eFiling and Reporting SAP Crystal Reports® Designer Security Requirement You are now required to set up security for your Sage 100 ERP system. When installing the software, you are now required to create an Administrator password. Each user must have a user logon created in User Maintenance in order to access the system. Participate in the Product Enhancement Program You can now participate in the Product Enhancement Program (PEP). Through PEP, Sage collects information that will help Sage identify trends and usage patterns to improve the quality of the products and services we offer. Sage will not collect sensitive information such as financial information or information on individual transactions. When installing or upgrading to a new version of Sage 100 ERP, you will be automatically enrolled in PEP. You can opt out at any time using the Product Enhancement Program window accessed through the Administrative Tools window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 26
  • 37. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes Retain Report and Form Printer Information Setting You can now retain report and form printer information by workstation ID and form code. This new functionality enables multiple users to save the printer information specific to their workstation ID when selecting a form code or report setting. Previously, the printer used by the last user of a form code or report setting was saved for the next user. Manage Your System Window The Manage Your System Window no longer appears when starting your Sage 100 ERP system. The tasks that were available through this window, Company Maintenance, Role Maintenance, and User Maintenance, can be accessed from the Library Master Main menu or through the Administrative Tools window, which appears when you log on using the Administrator account. Accounts Receivable Changes Create National Accounts A new feature has been added that allows you to create national accounts. National accounts allow you to create relationships between a bill-to account and its sold-to customers. Various fields have been added to Accounts Receivable Options that enable the use of national accounts.  Use the new Bill To Customer Maintenance task on the Accounts Receivable Setup menu to set up relationships between a national account and its sold-to customers. Any customer can be a national account or be a member of a national account.  Use the new Bill To/Sold To Maintenance task accessed from the Customer Maintenance window to create tiers of bill-to and sold-to customers.  You now have the option to print bill-to/sold-to information on various reports and forms. Additionally, bill-to/sold-to information can be printed in Statement Printing. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 27
  • 38. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes Define Default Price Levels by Customer and Product Line A new feature has been added that allows you to define default price levels by customer and product line. Default price levels for the customer can be set up by product line only, a combination of product line and price code, or product line and ship-to code. Two fields have been added to Sales Order Options that enable the default price level by customer and product line feature based on price codes or ship-to codes.  A new task, Price Level by Customer Maintenance, accessed from either the Accounts Receivable Setup menu, from Customer Maintenance, or from Product Line Maintenance, allows you to establish default price levels to use when entering sales orders and one-step sales order invoices.  You can copy all or specific product line/price level records from a customer to one or multiple customers using the new task, Price Level by Customer Copy, on the Accounts Receivable Setup menu, or by using the Copy button in Price Level by Customer Maintenance. You can also copy from a customer with existing records to a single customer by selecting Price Level from the drop-down menu in Customer Maintenance to open Price Level by Customer Maintenance and clicking Copy From.  A new report, Customer Pricing Report, has been added to the Accounts Receivable Reports menu that allows you to produce a list of customers’ special pricing and discounts, including customers that have been set up with product line/price level records. Purge Credit Card Data During Period-End Processing You can now define what credit card data is purged during Accounts Receivable period-end processing and year-end processing. A new field in the Period End Processing window allows you to purge either data for expired credit cards only, credit card history only, expired credit card data and credit card history, or you can choose to not purge any credit card information. Define Split Commissions by Customer You can now define default percentage values for distributing sales order and invoice commissions among salespersons on a per-customer basis. Clicking the new Split Comm button in Customer Maintenance opens the Customer Split Commission Maintenance window, which allows you to distribute commissions among a maximum of five salespersons. The default values defined in this window appear in the Split Commission Entry window accessed through Sales Order Entry and Sales Order Invoice Data Entry, but they can be changed. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 28
  • 39. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Bar Code Changes The Split Comm button is available in Customer Maintenance if the Split Commissions Between Salespersons check box is selected in Sales Order Options. Recalculate Open Order Amounts The Recalculate Open Order Amounts utility has been added to the Accounts Receivable Utilities menu. This utility allows you to recalculate the open order amounts from the Customer file for all customers based on open orders in the Sales Order data entry tasks. Bar Code Changes Print Lot/Serial Distribution Information New fields in Sales Order Options allows you to enable lot/serial distribution for sales orders. When enabled, you now have the option to print the lot/serial number and distribution on sales orders and picking sheets. Inventory Management Changes Inactive Items In Item Maintenance, an Inactive Item check box has been added that allows you to prevent users from selecting inactive items in certain data entry tasks. The following data entry tasks check for inactive items as noted:  In Sales Order Entry, Sales Order Invoice Data Entry, Purchase Order Entry, Receipt of Goods Entry, Receipt of Invoice Entry, and Material Requisition Issue Entry, an inactive item cannot be entered when adding a new line.  In Return of Goods Entry and Inventory Management Transaction Entry, an inactive item cannot be entered when adding a new line without the appropriate security setup.  In RMA Entry and RMA Receipts Entry, an inactive item cannot be selected as a replacement item.  In Shipping Data Entry, an inactive item cannot be selected as an alternate item. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 29
  • 40. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes An Inactive Item check box has also been added to the Product Line Maintenance window, which allows you to have the Inactive Item check box in Item Maintenance selected by default for new items added to a product line. You can also use the Apply Product Line Information window to apply the Inactive Item check box selection to existing items in Item Maintenance. You can now elect to include or exclude inactive items from most Inventory Management reports. View Lot/Serial Distribution Information  In Item Maintenance/Item Inquiry, on the Cost Detail tab, you can now view the committed quantities to various data entry tasks as well as the quantity available if the Lot/Serial Distribution feature in Sales Order Options is enabled. Additionally, on the Orders tab, you can now view the order detail by lot/serial number when clicking the View/Lot Serial button.  A new Lot/Serial Order Detail window has been added to the drop-down menu in Item Maintenance/Item Inquiry. This window displays the lot/serial distribution (including available quantities) for the selected item as well as the distribution already assigned to sales orders and the sales order items still waiting to be distributed.  You now have the option to print lot and serial distributions from sales orders on the Stock Status Report, Open Sales Order Report, Open Orders by Item Report, Open Orders by Promise Date Report, and Open Orders by Job Report. Library Master Changes Define Credit Card Security Options   The alternate directory feature is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Two new security event roles have been added in Role Maintenance to allow you to designate which roles can change or delete the key used to encrypt credit card numbers. Industry standards recommend that you change this key at least annually to enhance security of the encrypted credit card numbers stored in your system.  NOTE Two new preferences have been added in User Maintenance to allow you to designate users that can print or display fully formatted credit card numbers. Users without those preferences will see only the masked credit card number. The key used to encrypt the credit card information is now stored separately from your company data. By using the alternate directory feature, your key will be stored in a different physical location than your company data; thereby, increasing the security of the credit card information. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 30
  • 41. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Changes  A Credit Card Audit Log has been created. This log will show the following:  All credit card transaction requests sent to the payment server  Each time credit card numbers are encrypted or decrypted  Each time a user's print or display credit card preferences is changed  Each time a credit card key is changed or deleted Payroll Changes NOTE Payroll enhancements are not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Recalculate Deductions in Payroll Data Entry You now have multiple options for recalculating deductions that are based on earnings in Payroll Data Entry after changing, adding, or deleting data entry lines.  Click the new Recalc Deductions button in Payroll Data Entry.  Select Prompt at the new Recalc Deductions in Data Entry field in Payroll Options. When clicking Accept after changing, adding, or deleting a line in Payroll Data Entry, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to recalculate deductions for the selected employee.  Select Yes at the Recalc Deductions in Data Entry field in Payroll Options. Deductions will be automatically recalculated when clicking Accept after changing, adding, or deleting a line in Payroll Data Entry. You cannot manually overwrite a deduction if you select this option. Define Deduction Code Options Five new calculation methods are available in Deduction Code Maintenance; deductions can now be calculated as follows:  A percentage of another deduction (for employer contributions)  An amount multiplied by the total number of regular and overtime hours  An amount multiplied by the total hours worked multiplied by the pay rate multiplier  A percentage of the pay rate multiplied by the total hours worked  An amount multiplied by the pay rate You can now set up a deduction that is calculated based on selected earnings types. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 31
  • 42. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Changes Recalculate All Option for Payroll Imports A Recalc All button has been added to the message dialog box that appears when importing payroll data through Visual Integrator. Click the button to recalculate automatic deductions for all records in the Payroll Data Entry file regardless of whether they exist in the current import. If you click the button, any previously calculated automatic deduction amounts will be removed. Select Preconfigured Payroll Import Jobs Five preconfigured import jobs are now available to select when importing payroll data using the Visual Integrator module.  PR_ADP is configured to import delimited files in the ADP Paydata format.  PR_FORMAT_2 is configured to import ASCII files that use a fixed field format and include a job number.  PR_KRONOS is configured to import ASCII files in the Kronos Connect and Time Bank format.  PR_KRONOS_NO_DP is configured to import ASCII files in the Kronos Connect and Time Bank format.  PR_TIMETRAK is configured to import ASCII files in the Timetrak version 8.0 format. To make the jobs available in Import Job Maintenance, use the Job Import task to import the PayrollDataEntryImports.exp file, which is available in the MAS90PR folder. For more information, see Import Preconfigured Payroll Import Jobs in the Help system. Define Minimum Hours for Benefit Accrual A new field, Min Hrs/Check, has been added to Benefit Schedule Maintenance. This field allows you to define a minimum number of hours that must be worked per check before benefits will accrue. Identify Business Type A new field, Kind of Employer, has been added to the Federal eFiling and Reporting and State eFiling and Reporting tasks in the Payroll module, and the W2 Electronic Reporting task in the Electronic Reporting module. This new field allows you to identify your company’s type of business. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 32
  • 43. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Purchase Order Changes Purchase Order Changes Renamed Task The Auto Generate Orders Selection task on the Main menu has been renamed Auto Generate from Sales Orders. The task has been redesigned to facilitate the auto generation process. View Sales Orders from Purchase Order Entry In Purchase Order Entry, you can now click the new Sales Order button on the Lines tab to access and view the sales order for the purchase order without having to return to the Desktop to open Sales Order Entry. Set Up Additional Purchase Order/Auto Generate Options A new Generate tab has been added to Purchase Order Options. The tab features additional options for automatically generating purchase orders from sales orders. You now have the following options:  Combine multiple sales orders for a vendor into one purchase order  Use the sales order number as the purchase order number when automatically generating purchase orders from sales orders  Increment the purchase order number at the beginning or end when using the sales order number as the purchase order number  Select whether to base the purchase order header required date on the system date, purchase order date, sales order ship date, sales order order date, or to be prompted for a date prior to generating the purchase order  Select whether to base the purchase order line required date on the system date, purchase order date, sales order promise date, or to be prompted for a date prior to generating the purchase order  Print the Auto Generate from Sales Order Listing by customer number and print the Purchase Order Number Assignment Listing after generating the purchase orders  Automatically open the Purchase Order Entry window after generating the orders or print the purchase orders after generating the orders  Enable generating purchase orders from Sales Order Entry and elect to be prompted to generate purchase orders from Sales Order Entry for new sales orders Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 33
  • 44. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sales Order Changes  Elect to include the sales order ship-to address, ship via, FOB, confirm to, e-mail address, line item’s cost of goods sold (COGS) account, and alias item number for general alias item types on the purchase orders during generation. Sales Order Changes Set Up Additional Options for Job Cost A new Job Cost tab has been added to Sales Order Options. The tab features additional options for integrating the Job Cost module with Sales Order. You now have the following options:  Update invoice costs to job estimates  Post costs for drop-ship lines to the Job Cost module  If the Purchase Order module is set up and integrated with Job Cost, you can post costs for drop-ship lines in Purchase Order  Have the job status automatically set to complete when the Sales Journal is updated  Elect to relieve job costs from the work in process account and post them to the cost of sales account  Have the quantity entered in Sales Order Entry update the quantity on sales order and quantity on hand values used in the Inventory Management module  Include the job number and description in the general ledger posting comment  Define how exploded kit component items and costs are updated to the Job Transaction Detail file  Define how the system handles a discrepancy between the currently selected customer number and the job number entered in Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry  Define which cost of goods sold account and sales revenue account are used for line items in Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 34
  • 45. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sales Order Changes Also, the following fields have been relocated to the Job Cost tab:     Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost Require Job Number Allow Jobs to be Created Automatically Require Cost Code Calculate Sales Commissions by Line Item A new task, Line Item Commission Maintenance, has been added to the Sales Order Setup menu. The task allows you to set up salesperson commission rates and amounts by combinations of salespersons, customers, inventory items, and effective dates. Calculate Item Pricing by Total Quantity New fields in Sales Order Options allow you to combine the ordered quantity for multiple sales order and invoice lines when calculating quantity pricing discounts. You can elect to use the total ordered quantity for all lines, or you can combine lines by product line or by the item categories defined in Inventory Management. You can define which unit of measure to use for totaling the quantity ordered, and you can specify whether you want the item pricing by quantity applied automatically, when prompted, or for new entries only. Additionally, an Item Price button has been added to Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry, which you can click to apply item pricing by quantity to the current order or invoice. The rules that you set up for sales orders and Sales Order invoices will also be applied to eBusiness Manager shopping cart orders when they are accepted into Sales Order. Distribute Lot/Serial Items from Sales Order Entry Two new fields have been added to Sales Order Options that allow you to enable lot/serial distribution for sales orders and require that the sales order lines be fully distributed.  You now have the option to distribute lot and serial numbers when creating sales orders, similar to S/O Invoice Data Entry, and print the lot and serial numbers on sales orders and picking sheets. This feature allows you to specify a lot and serial number and commit the item at the sales order level so they cannot be used by other tasks. The lot/serial distribution can then be pulled into Invoice Data Entry when the sales orders are invoiced.  The new Lot/Serial Search button in Sales Order Entry allows you to find sales orders that are referencing specific lot/serial numbers. This feature allows you to easily select the lot/serial number and order for adjustments. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 35
  • 46. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Retired Modules You can now elect to include or exclude lot and serial distribution from all Open Sales Order reports and the Inventory Stock Status Report. Additionally, you now have the option to print the lot/serial number and distribution on sales orders and picking sheets. Generate Purchase Orders from Sales Orders  You can now click the new Purchase Order button on the Lines tab to access and view the purchase order for the sales order without having to return to the Desktop to open Purchase Order Entry. Additionally, you can now generate a purchase order by clicking the Generate PO button on the Totals tab.  You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users from overriding the bill-to customer number during order entry. Assign Vendors to Miscellaneous/Special Items  You can now select a vendor number for miscellaneous and special items so that a purchase order can be automatically generated for these item types. For regular inventory items, this field defaults to the items primary vendor but can be changed. For previously entered sales orders, the Vendor Number field will be blank.  You can now use a security module option in Role Maintenance to allow users to view the vendor number during order entry. Retired Modules The following modules have been retired as of version 4.50:      StarShip (Freight and Parcel) FRx Reporting F9 Business Alerts Select Report Master Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 36
  • 47. Chapter 6 Workflow Changes in 4.40.0.X Chapter 6 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.40 release and product updates 4.40.0.1 through 4.40.0.5 that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module retirements. Installation Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Upgrading  If you are upgrading from any level prior to 3.71, you must first upgrade to Level 3.71, and then perform a parallel installation with version 4.40.  If you have Level 3.x software and version 4.40 software installed on the same workstation, only install SAP Crystal Reports XI Release 2 for Sage 100 ERP version 4.40 because only this version can read SAP Crystal Reports in both level 3.x and version 4.x. Global Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Data File Multi-Segment NOTE Contact your development partner if you have segmented files prior to version 4.40. Sage does not support the conversion of those segmented files.  Sage 100 ERP now supports segmented files. Data files that are reaching the 2 GB limit will now be segmented. Adding the segmented feature available in ProvideX will enhance the product’s ability to handle large data files. For example, the previous need to purge data from history files when the files reached the 2 GB limit has been eliminated. The following is an example of how a segmented file would look in a company’s data folder: • IM_ItemTransactionHistory.M4T • IM_ItemTransaction History.M4T.001 • IM_ItemTransactionHistory.M4T.002  Index and sort files for modules that have not been upgraded to the Business Framework will not be segmented.  The Rebuild utilities are now enhanced to accommodate segmented files and a progress meter will appear when running the rebuild process. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 37
  • 48. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Global Changes Activity Log The Activity Log provides a log of all data removed and the date used. Previously, the data removed and date used was not recorded for 4.x level. Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE)  When you are customizing a lookup in any module other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, you can add fields from linked files to the lookup.  Customizations to lookups in any module other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order will not be converted to your version 4.40 software. You will need to re-create lookup customizations in the affected modules. This includes customizations created in the User Lookup Wizard and by clicking Custom in a lookup window. Batch Faxing The fax number must include the area code to process a fax. Previously, if the fax number was within the local area, the area code was not required. Character-Based Forms Forms for all modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are printed using SAP Crystal Reports. You can no longer print character-based or nongraphical forms for those modules. Customized Crystal Forms  Customized Crystal forms in all modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order will need to be re-created after upgrading to version 4.40.  Run the Form Comparison report to compare your customized forms to a default form from the prior version. This report prints the form name, folder, .rpt name, form code, and any fields (including user-defined fields) that were added or removed from the standard forms shipped with version 4.x. Use this report as a reference to modify the default version 4.40 Crystal forms. This report (SYWFCU) is available on the product CD and on the Sage Online Web site at: www.sagesoftwareonline.com Data Dictionary Changes The Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, and Work Order file layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item code and expanded customer number options. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 38
  • 49. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Global Changes Data Entry  To access the Record Count functionality in any module other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, right-click in a window and select System Info. The old method of pressing F8 is still available in all other modules.  On the Lines tab of data entry windows in any module other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, at a field, press F2 or click the Lookup button to access the lookup window. After entering the field, the Lookup button no longer appears; however, you can still press F2 to access the lookup window. Desktop  Task folders in your Level 3.x Launcher's My Tasks area will not be migrated to your version 4.40 Desktop. You will need to re-create your task folders.  Buttons on your Level 3.x Launcher's Custom toolbar will not be migrated to your version 4.40 Desktop's Custom toolbar. You will need to re-create your buttons on the Custom toolbar. Expanded Customer Numbers Reports and forms have changed to accommodate the expanded customer number field. Expanded Item Codes Reports and forms have changed to accommodate the expanded item code field. Printing  All reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this, those modules no longer use the settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.  For reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, the process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed. In those modules, the Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information on how to export or print reports to a file in these modules, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 39
  • 50. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes  For reports and listings in modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order the process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. In those modules, the Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a report in these modules, see Defer a Report in the Help system.  Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the following locations:  Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order deferred files are located at ..HomeTextout.  All other module files are located at ..HomeDeferred. Reports and Forms  WARNING Reports on the Custom Reports menus will not be migrated from your Level 3.x to version 4.40 software. In modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order, report setting options now appear on the header area of the applicable report window. You can also define and save customized report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in the Help system.  The organization of reports on the Custom Reports menus will not be migrated from your Level 3.x software to version 4.40. Before upgrading, use the SUMNUA utility in your Level 3.x software to print copies of the existing Custom Reports menus' organization to facilitate adding your reports to the Custom Reports menus in your version 4.40 software. To access the SUMNUA utility in your Level 3.x software, select File menu > Run. In the Run Program window, type SUMNUA. Library Master Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Changed Tasks The Automatic Update process is now performed using Task Scheduler for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order. Role Maintenance Override passwords previously maintained in Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order Options are now handled as security events in Role Maintenance. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 40
  • 51. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes Accounts Payable Changes Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.2 ACH Electronic Payment Processing  In Accounts Payable Options, the following fields have been renamed:  The Check Register in Detail check box has been renamed Check and Electronic Payment Register in Detail.  The Check Comments Field has been renamed Check/Electronic Payment Comments.  The Print G/L Distribution on Check Register check box has been renamed Print G/L Distribution on Check/Electronic Payment Registers.  The Include Voided Checks and Include Wire Transfers fields have been removed from the Accounts Payable Check History Report window. They have been replaced with a Payment Types to Print section, which includes a Voided Checks check box and a Wire Transfers check box.  The Include Wire Transfers field has been removed from the Payment History Report window. It has been replaced with a Payment Types to Print section, which includes a Wire Transfers check box. Renamed Tasks  The Check Printing Menu has been renamed Check Printing and Electronic Payment to reflect the ability to pay vendors electronically.  Check Maintenance has been renamed Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance.  Check Printing has been renamed Check Printing and Electronic Payment.  Check Register has been renamed Check and Electronic Payment Register. If you are processing electronic payments, you will be prompted to print the Check Register and then the Electronic Payment Register. Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 Renamed Tasks  Manual Check Entry has been renamed Manual Check and Payment Entry to reflect the added ability to record and reverse wire transfers. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 41
  • 52. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes  The Manual Check Register task has been renamed Manual Check and Payment Register. Change in Version 4.40 Renamed Task The Detail Receipt History task in Vendor Maintenance has been renamed Vendor Receipt History. Accounts Receivable Changes Change in Version 4.40 Renamed Task The Detail Sales History task in Customer Maintenance has been renamed Customer Sales History. Bank Reconciliation Changes Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.3 Registers and Updates You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users from updating the registers. Renamed Task The Bank Reconciliation Register task on the Main menu has been renamed to Bank Reconciliation Report. Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 Enter Checks, Deposits, and Adjustments On-the-Fly In Reconcile Bank, you can now enter checks, deposits, and adjustments on the fly. Previously, you had to exit Reconcile Bank and enter additional checks, deposits, or adjustments in Check, Deposit and Adjustment Entry. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 42
  • 53. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Bar Code Changes Bar Code Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Bar Code Options The Graphical Forms field has been removed as the Bar Code module now uses SAP Crystal Reports to print forms and reports. Unattended Bar Code Transaction Import ODB files are no longer imported using the Unattended Bar Code Transaction Import task. ODB files must now be imported using Import Bill of Materials Transactions, Import Inventory Transactions, Import Purchase Order Transactions, and Import Sales Order Transactions. Renamed Tasks  The Period End Processing task has been renamed Purge Bar Code History.  The Bar Code P/O Receiver Printing task has been renamed Purchase Order Printing. Bill of Materials Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Global Changes  You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import bill of materials data.  You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the entry.  You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously, only the first 24 characters were displayed. Bill of Materials Options  The option to Allow Entry of Negative Quantities no longer applies to Option Interaction Maintenance.  If the Allow Kit Bills and/or the Allow Phantom Bills check boxes are cleared, a message dialog box will now appear in Bill of Materials Options. Previously, the message dialog box displayed in Bill of Materials Maintenance. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 43
  • 54. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Bill of Materials Changes  You can now enter a unique next automatic disassembly number. Previously, Production Entry and Disassembly Entry shared the same option. Data Entry In all data entry windows, the Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity Inquiry window. Inquiry Changes  The Bill of Materials Inquiry and Bill of Materials Where-Used Inquiry windows have been re-designed with new fields and drill downs.  The Options button in Bill of Materials Inquiry and Bill of Materials Where-Used Inquiry has been replaced with radio buttons for the different selections to inquire on. Additionally, a tree view now displays when the Indented view is selected. Printing  Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this, the Bill of Materials module no longer uses the settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.  The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed. The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system.  The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the "Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box, so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings.  Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the ..HomeDeferred folder.  The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain in portrait format. Reports and Forms Report setting options now appear on the header area of the applicable report window. You can also define and save customized report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 44
  • 55. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Business Insights Changes Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  All the inquiry windows on the Main menu have been moved to the Inquiries menu.  The Replace/Delete Component Entry task on the Change Control menu has been renamed Replace and Delete Component Entry.  The Replace/Delete Component Register has been renamed Replace and Delete Component Register.  The Miscellaneous Charge Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been renamed Miscellaneous Item Maintenance. This task is also available from the Common Information Main menu. Business Insights Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Business Insights Reporter After upgrading to version 4.40, you will need to re-create Business Insights Reporter reports used in Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order. NOTE The Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing prints fields, sorts, and filters for the report you need to re-create.  For custom reports previously created using version 4.30 or prior data from the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order modules, access Business Insights Reporter and select a report in the Business Insights Reporter Selection window. You are prompted to print the Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing and then delete the report. Repeat this process for each custom report previously created for the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order modules. Common Information Changes Change in Product Update 4.40.0.2 Bank Code Maintenance In Role Maintenance, a new module option for Common Information has been created that controls which users can change the current balance for each bank defined in Bank Code Maintenance. Previously, there was no security for this function so all users could change the current balance. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 45
  • 56. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Common Information Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Miscellaneous Item Maintenance Miscellaneous Item Maintenance has been added to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Bill of Materials Setup menu and Purchase Order Setup menu. Common Information Options  The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Inventory Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup menu and in the Purchase Order Options window on the Purchase Order Setup menu, have been moved to the Common Information Options window on the Common Information Setup menu.  The Years to Retain Item History field, previously in the Inventory Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup menu, has been moved to the Common Information Options window on the Common Information Setup menu. Additionally, a minimum of two years is now required to retain history.  NOTE These options do not apply in Accounts Receivable Invoice Data Entry and Repetitive Invoice Entry. If the Inventory Management module is not set up for a company, the Common Information period history will be accumulated based on the General Ledger fiscal year setup. If the Inventory Management module is set up, the history will be accumulated based on the selection made at the Base Inventory Periods On field in Inventory Management Options. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  The Unit of Measure Conversion Maintenance task, previously on the Inventory Management Setup menu, has been moved to the Common Information Setup menu.  The Purge Miscellaneous Item History has been renamed Purge Item History.  Purge Obsolete Extended Descriptions, previously on the Library Master Utilities menu, has been moved to the Common Information Utilities menu.  Memo Manager Maintenance, previously on the Library Master Setup menu, has been moved to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Purchase Order Setup menu and Inventory Management Setup menu. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 46
  • 57. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Customizer Changes Customizer Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Global Changes  Customized libraries for the Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order modules will not be migrated and must be re-created after the migration process.  Data entry user-defined fields (UDFs) must be re-created in User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance after upgrading to version 4.40. After re-creating UDFs, you must map the UDFs to their respective history files. For more information, see Map User-Defined Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.  For Purchase Order Receipt of Goods, Receipt of Invoice, and Return of Goods, the new Purchase Order Invoice UDF migrated or converted to 4.40 from 4.20 or 4.30 is no longer needed. For UDFs that existed in the Purchase Order Invoice UDF file, these records will need to be imported into an AP Invoice History Header UDF. The Purchase Order Invoice UDFs are not automatically merged into the AP Invoice History Header UDF upon upgrading to 4.40.  When upgrading from a previous version of 4.x, the following list of UDFs are updated to specific tables:  The Bill of Materials Header UDFs are now updated to the new BM Bill Header table.  The Bill of Materials Lines UDFs are now updated to the new BM Bill Detail table.  The Inventory Management Warehouse Detail UDFs are updated to the new IM Item Warehouse table.  The Purchase Order Receipt History UDFs are now updated to the new PO Receipt History Header table.  The Purchase Order Receipt/Return Lines UDFs are now updated to the new PO Receipt History Detail table.  The Purchase Order UDFs are now updated to the new PO Purchase Order Header table.  The Purchase Order Lines UDFS are now updated to the new PO Purchase Order Detail table. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 47
  • 58. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ eBusiness Manager Changes eBusiness Manager Changes NOTE The eBusiness Manager module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Changes in Version 4.40 Sage Web Engine  You must uninstall the Sage Web Engine, and then re-install it after upgrading to version 4.40.  If you have customized templates in the IW folder, back them up in another location before uninstalling the Sage Web Engine. After uninstalling, you must merge your customized templates with the Standard templates as some have changed for corrections or enhancements.  Enabling item code expansion (from 15 to 30 characters) can cause layout changes in your HTML templates when rendering in a browser. You should verify if your customized templates are affected. General Ledger Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Fiscal Year Maintenance  In Fiscal Year Maintenance, if you change an existing period-end date and/or year, the Item History by Period information is now included as part of the recalculation. Previously, the system recalculated only the General Ledger Posting History by Period and Sales Order Recap information.  The functionality of the Recalculate button has been changed to recalculate only the Sales Order Recap information. Previously, clicking this button recalculated the General Ledger summary information. You can now use the Recalculate Account Balances utility on the Utilities menu to recalculate the General Ledger information. Inventory Management Changes Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.5 Inactive Items An Inactive Item check box has been added to the Item Maintenance, Product Line Maintenance, and Apply Product Line Information windows. Internet enabled items cannot be inactive. If the Inactive Item check box is selected for an item, its Internet Enabled check box will automatically be cleared and disabled. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 48
  • 59. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Inventory Management Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Global Changes  If the Inventory Management module is not set up for a company, the Common Information period history will be accumulated based on the General Ledger fiscal year setup. If the Inventory Management module is set up, the history will be accumulated based on the selection made at the Base Inventory Periods On field in Inventory Management Options.  You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the entry.  You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously, only the first 24 characters were displayed.  You can now print receipt labels after printing or previewing the Transaction Register. Previously, you could only print the receipt labels before the update process.  You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import inventory data. Inventory Management Options  The ability to sort physical count by bin location, previously in the Inventory Management Options window on the Setup menu has been moved to the Physical Count Worksheet and Physical Count Entry tasks on the Physical Count menu. You can now select to print by bin location.  The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Inventory Management Options window on the Inventory Management Setup menu has been moved to the Common Information Options window on the Common Information Setup menu.  The Retain Transaction History check box has been removed from the Inventory Management Options window. You can now use the Purge Item History utility on the Inventory Management or Common Information Utilities menu to purge transaction history. Additionally, at least 2 years retention is required.  The ability to add a not-on-file warehouse has been removed. Validation occurs now when the warehouse code is entered.  The next automatic entry numbers options have been moved to the new Entry tab. In addition, you can now enter alphanumeric and special characters. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 49
  • 60. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Inventory Management Changes Product Line Maintenance The Allow Back Orders check box must first be selected to enable the Allow Returns check box. Selecting the Allow Returns check box will now be the entry default selection for items in the Item Maintenance window and can be applied to existing inventory items by clicking Apply. Previously, the Allow Back Orders and Allow Returns check boxes were both enabled, and an inventory item created with this product line then inherited these settings. Transaction Entry  You can now use the batch entry feature to perform multiple entry sessions simultaneously.  You can now clear a previous distribution to enter a new distribution in the Distribution Entry window when adjusting an item. Previously, you had to enter a 0 (zero) at the Distribute field to clear the FIFO/LIFO/ Lot/Serial Number and Receipt No. fields. Item Maintenance  Some hot keys have been changed to provide convenient shortcuts to tasks that are otherwise accessed through menu navigation. For a list of the updated hot keys, see Using Hot Keys in Item Maintenance in the Help system.  The Standard Cost field can no longer be changed for standard cost items with activity. If activity exists, this field can only be viewed. Instead, use the new Standard Cost Adjustment Entry task to adjust the standard cost.  You can now view the information on a grid by quantity, sales, or receipts by selecting the Quantities, Sales, or Receipts option on the new History tab. Previously, you had to click the History button on the Main tab to view item quantity, sales, or receipt information.  Quantity information previously in the Quantity on Hand and Reorder windows, is now available on the Quantity tab. Reorder information can be accessed by clicking the Reorder button on the Quantity tab and on the More button.  Buttons on the Main tab have been moved to the More button. Physical Count Changes  You can now print the Physical Count Worksheet by bin location and quantity on hand. Previously, the worksheet could only be printed by item code and item description, and the quantity on hand was not available to print. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 50
  • 61. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Inventory Management Changes  The Physical Count Entry task now checks the Sales Order, Return Merchandise Authorization, Bill of Materials, Purchase Order, and Work Order modules and displays a warning if unprocessed inventory transaction entries exist when trying to freeze the items. Previously, it only checked Inventory Management. Costing Changes  If an average cost item has negative quantity on hand, when items are received, the cost is adjusted only for the quantity received. Previously, the cost was adjusted for the entire negative quantity.  The Inventory Detail Transaction Report, Inventory Trial Balance Report, and Inventory Valuation Report by Period now print the historical standard cost by default and a selection to print the current or historical cost is now available in the report windows. Previously, only the current standard cost was provided.  The Automatic Cost and Price Change task is no longer used to change the standard cost for standard cost items. You must use Standard Cost Adjustment Entry on the Inventory Management Utilities menu to change the standard cost for standard cost items. Utilities Menu A new Utilities menu has been added to the Inventory Management module. The tasks available in this menu are:            Delete and Change Items Purge Item History Remove Zero Quantity Costing Tiers Recalculate Item History Item Valuation Change Selection Item Valuation Change Maintenance Item Valuation Change Register/Update Automatic Cost and Price Change Standard Cost Adjustment Selection Standard Cost Adjustment Entry Stand Cost Adjustment Register/Update Period End Processing Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End Processing task accessed from the Period End menu. Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Only Remove Detail History option has been replaced with the Purge Item History task on the Utilities menu. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 51
  • 62. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Inventory Management Changes  The Only Remove Costing Tiers with Zero Quantities option has been replaced with the Remove Zero Quantity Costing Tiers task on the Utilities menu.  The Only Remove Transaction Detail option has been removed. Printing  You can now print receipt labels after printing or previewing the Transaction Register. Previously, you could only print receipt labels before the update process.  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the message dialog box stating there is no data in the range to print so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings.  Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this, the Inventory Management module no longer uses the settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.  The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed. The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer field, and it uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system.  The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.  Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the ..HomeDeferred folder.  The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain in portrait format. Reports and Forms  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the "Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings.  The Inventory Valuation Report by Period can now print items with zero balances and the unit cost for standard cost items can be viewed by current or historical transactions. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  The Inventory Maintenance and Inventory Inquiry tasks on the Main menu have been renamed Item Maintenance and Item Inquiry. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 52
  • 63. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Job Cost Changes  The Transaction Journal on the Main menu has been renamed Transaction Register.  The Automatic Cost/Price Change task has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Automatic Cost and Price Change.  The Sales Kit Listing on the Kits menu has been renamed Sales Kit Report.  The Inventory Memo Printing report on the Reports menu has been renamed Item Memo Printing.  The Item Masterfile Audit Report on the Reports menu has been renamed Item Audit Report.  The U/M Conversion Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been renamed Unit of Measure Conversion Maintenance and moved to the Common Information Setup menu.  The Buyer/Planner Code Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been renamed Buyer and Planner Code Maintenance.  The Bar Code Printer Maintenance task on the Setup menu has been moved to the Work Order Setup menu.  The Item Delete/Renumber/Merge option in the Inventory Management Utilities window on the Setup menu has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and Change Items.  The Item Valuation Change Selection, Item Valuation Change Maintenance, and Item Valuation Change Register options in the Inventory Management Utilities task on the Setup menu have been moved to the Utilities menu.  The name of the hidden utility, IMZBL1, has been changed to IM_BalanceQtyOnHand_UI. Job Cost Changes NOTE The Job Cost module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Changes in Version 4.40 Job Cost Options The Timberline Estimating and Directory for Estimating Database fields in the Job Cost Options window have been removed due to the retirement of Timberline Link. Data Dictionary Changes The file layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item code and expanded customer number options. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 53
  • 64. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Changes Payroll Changes NOTE The Payroll module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Change in Product Update 4.40.0.5 Quarterly 941 Printing In the Quarterly 941 Printing window, the Tax Due on Unreported Tips field has been added. Change in Version 4.40 Quarterly 941 Printing In the Quarterly 941 Printing window, the Current Tax Withholding, Prior Quarter Social Sec/Medicare, Additions to Federal Tax, and Additions to Social Sec/Medicare fields have been removed. The COBRA Premium Assist. Payments and Individuals Provided COBRA Assist. fields have been added. Purchase Order Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Global Changes  You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import purchase order data.  You can now undo accidental data entry changes to a data entry screen. Previously, you could only save the changes or cancel the entry.  You can now view all 30 characters of the item description. Previously, only the first 24 characters were displayed.  The Tabs button has been removed from data entry tasks and the settings are now available as part of the data entry grid.  Batch processing is now handled through system Batch Manager programs. Previously, there was one Batch Processing option that applied to the data entry tasks. Receipt of Goods/Invoice Entry and Return Of Goods/Material Requisition Issue Entry tasks now have their own batch options. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 54
  • 65. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Purchase Order Changes  Previously, historical data was stored by the period to date (PTD), year to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Purchase Order purchases and receipt history are now stored by period by year. The conversion for purchases and receipts history is now performed as follows: • The PTD record is converted to the current period. • The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period (for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD amount should be in May). • The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the prior year.  The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year. Purchase Order Options  The ability to create passwords or allow overrides to data entry security options has been removed from Purchase Order Options and replaced with security event options in Role Maintenance on the Library Master Main menu.  The Number of Decimal Places fields, previously in the Purchase Order Options window on the Purchase Order Setup menu, have been moved to the Common Information Options window on the Common Information Setup menu.  The ability to inquire on a memo from an entry task has been replaced with the Memo Manager Maintenance task on the Common Information Main menu.  Entry options have been moved to the Entry tab, line entry options have been moved to the Line Entry tab, printing options have been moved to the Printing tab, and history options have been moved to the History tab.  You can now display all drop-ship lines from a sales order, regardless of the assigned purchase order vendor. Previously, when a drop-ship purchase order was entered, the drop-ship lines on the sales order would display if the vendor matched one of the vendors assigned to the item.  You can now remove purchase history from the Purchase Order file by selecting the Purge Purchases History Utility task on the Purchase Order Utilities menu. Previously, the purchase history was removed during period-end processing.  You can now retain comment lines in receipt history. Previously, the Accounts Payable module controlled comments for receipt history. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 55
  • 66. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Purchase Order Changes  You can now select a format to use for posting comments to General Ledger.  Additional fields have been added to print the Back Order Fill Report. Purchases History  Previously, purchase history was saved by period and month. With version 4.40 and higher, purchase history is now continuously saved by receipt date and posting date.  You must now retain at least two years of purchase history at the Years to Retain Purchase History field in the Purchase Order Options window, with the option to retain up to 99 years. Data Entry  The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity Inquiry window in Purchase Order Entry, Receipt of Goods Entry, and Receipt of Invoice Entry.  The Tabs button has been removed and a Defaults button added to all data entry windows.  You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users from adding inventory items on the fly. Previously, the Allow On-the-Fly Additions of Inventory Items field was available in Purchase Order Options. Utilities Menu A new Utilities menu has been added to the Purchase Order module. The tasks available in this menu are:       Purge Completed Purchase Orders Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders Purge Purchase Order Receipt History Purge Purchases History Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 56
  • 67. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Purchase Order Changes Period End Processing Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End Processing task accessed from the Period End menu. Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Purge Completed Purchase Orders option has been replaced with the Purge Completed Purchase Orders task.  The Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders option has been replaced with the Purge Expired and Master Repeating Order task.  The Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap option has been replaced with the Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap task.  The Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders option has been replaced with the Purge Obsolete Purchase Orders task. Additionally, records dated on or before the purge date entered has been removed.  The Purge Purchase Order Receipt History option has been replaced with the Purge Purchase Order Receipt History task.  The Purge Purchases History utility has been added to the Utilities menu to remove purchase history. Previously, the purchase history was removed during period-end processing. Printing  Reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this, the Purchase Order module no longer uses the settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the message dialog box stating there is no data in the range to print so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings.  The process for exporting or printing a report to a file has changed. The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer field and it uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information on how to export or print reports to a file, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system.  The process for deferring the printing of a report has changed. The Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a report, see Defer a Report in the Help system.  Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located in the ..HomeDeferred folder. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 57
  • 68. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Purchase Order Changes  The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain in portrait format. Registers and Updates The Purchase Order Variance Register now prints after the register and before the update. Previously, this register printed after the update. Reports and Forms  In the Back Order Fill Report, you can now print only the items that have a back ordered quantity on the sales order if the received quantity is not equal to zero. Previously, the report printed all items on the purchase order that had a back ordered quantity on the sales order.  Report setting options now appear on the header area of the applicable report window. You can also define and save customized report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in the Help system.  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the "Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  The Purge Completed Purchase Orders, Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders, Purge Completed or Cancelled PO Recap, and Purge Obsolete Purchase Order utilities have been moved from the Period End Processing window to the Utilities menu.  The Purge Purchase Order Receipt History and Purge Purchases History utilities have been added to the Utilities menu.  The Open PO by Item Report has been renamed Open Orders by Item Report.  The Open PO by Job Report has been renamed Open Orders by Job Report.  The Receipt History Report has been renamed Purchase Order Receipt History Report.  The Open PO by Work Order Report has been renamed Open Orders by Work Order Report. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 58
  • 69. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Return Merchandise Authorization Changes  The Automatic Reorder Selection option has been renamed Auto Reorder Selection.  The Ship to Address Maintenance task has been renamed Ship-To Address Maintenance.  The Miscellaneous Charge Maintenance task has been renamed Miscellaneous Item Maintenance. Return Merchandise Authorization Changes Change in Version 4.40 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity Inquiry window in RMA Entry and RMA Receipts Entry. Sales Order Changes Changes in Product Update 4.40.0.1 Checking for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers  The Check for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers check box in the Sales Order Options window has been replaced with the Files to Check for Duplicate Customer PO Numbers section.  You can now select which Sales Order and Accounts Receivable History and Entry files are searched when entering sales orders and invoices.  In Role Maintenance you now have a module option to prevent the use of duplicate customer purchase order numbers. Data Entry When creating a sales order from a master or repeating order or quote, the payment type on the sales order will be defaulted from the default payment type in Customer Maintenance. Previously it would default from the payment type in the master or repeating order or quote. Expanded Quick Print Options The Quick Print button in Sales Order Entry has been replaced with the Print Order button, and the Print Pick button has been added. Based on selections in Sales Order Options, you can now quick print picking sheets in Sales Order Entry, and you can receive a prompt to quick print picking sheets and shipping labels immediately after quick printing sales orders. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 59
  • 70. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sales Order Changes Changes for Picking Sheet Printing  A picking sheet is no longer printed if the source sales order is in use in Sales Order Entry during the picking sheet selection process.  If the Print Pick Sheets check box for a sales order is not cleared after the picking sheet is printed because the order is in use by another user during the printing process, the message dialog box that appears now lists the affected orders. Also, you can now turn off this message in Sales Order Options; the order information will then be written to the Activity Log. Changes in Version 4.40 Sales History Reports The Customer Sales History Report now prints by invoice date or posting date depending on whether you base inventory periods by physical periods or calendar months. Previously, this report was printed by period or month. This same report also printed sales history by item or product line. Now you can print information using three new reports.    Customer Sales History by Item Customer Sales History by Product Line Customer Sales History Security Option for Adding Inventory Items on the Fly You can now use a security event in Role Maintenance to prevent users from adding inventory items on the fly. Previously, the Allow On-the-Fly Additions of Inventory Items field was available in Sales Order Options. Data Entry  In the Sales Order Entry window, the user login ID is now displayed if security is set up. Previously, the user code displayed.  The Item Inquiry window has been replaced with the Item Quantity Inquiry window in Sales Order Entry and Invoice Data Entry. Renamed Tasks  The Monthly Recap by Division has been renamed Sales Recap by Division.  The Monthly Recap by Product Line has been renamed Sales Recap by Product Line.  The Monthly Recap by Warehouse has been renamed Sales Recap by Warehouse.  The Monthly Recap by Warehouse by Product Line has been renamed Sales Recap by Warehouse by Product Line. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 60
  • 71. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Visual Integrator Changes Visual Integrator Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Data Dictionaries Before you use the Visual Integrator module, select Visual Integrator Main menu > Export Job Maintenance or Import Job Maintenance after installing version 4.40. This initiates the necessary update of the Data Dictionaries so that you can successfully create Visual Integrator jobs. Data Dictionary Listing File information for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order is no longer included on the Data Dictionary Listing. To obtain file information for these modules, on the Desktop, access the Resources page and click the File Layouts and Program Information link. You must re-create Visual Integrator jobs for these modules. Import Job Maintenance  When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job Maintenance, the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In the V/I Import Job Selection window, you can enter a new job name or select an existing job. For new jobs, you must select the table (previously referred to as File Name) for which the import will be prepared. After a table is selected, the Import Job Maintenance window appears. If a table for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, or Work Order is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, only the tables for those modules are available for selection at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order module is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, files from only these modules are available at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window.  The Validation tab is no longer available because validation is done by the business object. When you create a job for the Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order modules, the Validation tab is available.  In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a job for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, TimeCard, or Work Order, you cannot test or execute the import job until your system administrator gives you the rights to execute the job in Role Maintenance. Previously, system security did not prevent you from immediately executing jobs for these modules. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 61
  • 72. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Work Order Changes  You must re-create all Visual Integrator jobs to import inventory, bill of materials, and purchase order data.  All data entry business objects now allow an existing line item in the Detail file to be modified. The Line Key field is now displayed in red and its value must be provided to edit an existing detail line. If the value provided is blank or invalid, a new detail line will be added from the import record.  The ability to import lot and serial distribution records is now included in the related header import. In the Available Fields section of the Data tab, tier distribution fields are now available and are preceded by the letters LL. Previously, importing lot and distribution records was available only in Sales Order Invoice Data Entry and required a tier distribution record type using a pre-defined tier distribution import layout.  In the Import Job Maintenance window, in the Available Selections section of the Record tab, the Change Next On option has been removed. When evaluating the Header information in the Source file and a change is found, the next record is automatically created. It is important to have consistent Header information when importing multiple line and distribution records. For example, if the key value (sales order number) in the Source file is the same for three rows, and one field in each row has a different value, the subsequent row will replace the previous row imported with the same key.  The Job Import Log now contains the record type to distinguish between Header, Line, and Distribution records. Previously, only the Header and Line records displayed. The Distribution records were appended to the Line records. Work Order Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks NOTE The Work Order module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. The Bar Code Printer Maintenance task, previously on the Inventory Management Setup menu, has been moved to the Work Order Setup menu. File Layout The file layouts have been changed to accommodate the expanded item code and expanded customer number options. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 62
  • 73. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Report Master Changes Report Master Changes Changes in Version 4.40 Reports  Reports for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are now created using Business Insights Reporter. Report Master reports can no longer be generated for these modules.  Sage recommends using Business Insights Reporter to create custom reports for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order.  Sage recognizes that you may have expended considerable time and effort creating custom reports for Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order in Report Master. As a result, although Report Master has been removed, it can still be accessed by using a hidden utility. To access Report Master, select File > Run and type *unhiderm in the Run Program window. Retired Modules The following modules were retired as of version 4.40:     Timberline ACT! Link SageCRM version 6.1 (This does not apply to Extended Enterprise Suite customers) Crystal Web Reports Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 63
  • 74. Chapter 7 Workflow Changes in 4.30 Chapter 7 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.30 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module retirements. Installation Changes The option for installing Microsoft Internet Explorer is removed because the version of Internet Explorer required is now available with the supported versions of Windows. Global Changes Reports and Forms  The information previously on the Main and Select tabs in report windows is now conveniently on one screen.  The report and form windows now remain open when you receive the "Data is not selected for report printing" message dialog box, so you can resolve the issue without losing your settings. Selection Grids In the selection grids, you can now enter the Value fields before selecting an operand. Library Master Changes Role Maintenance  When defining a role in Role Maintenance to provide users with access to Business Insights Reporter, select the Business Insights Reporter check box under Library Master > Setup Options. This check box was previously located under the Business Insights folder in Role Maintenance.  You can now set up access to the Business Insights Dashboard for each user using the Dashboard Maintenance Wizard. The module options for the Business Insights Dashboard are removed from Role Maintenance. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 64
  • 75. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes Accounts Receivable Changes Customer Statements You must now set up the Paperless Office module to e-mail statements to customers. Previously, to e-mail customer statements, you had to select the E-mail Statements check box in Customer Maintenance and then select the appropriate option at the Produce Statements For field in the Statement Printing window. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. Business Insights Changes Business Insights Dashboard  To take advantage of the Business Insights Dashboard's upgraded architecture, you must set up your Dashboard pages again. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system.  Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is required to view the Dashboard pages.  You can now set up access to the Business Insights Dashboard for each user using the Dashboard Maintenance Wizard. The module options for the Business Insights Dashboard are removed from Role Maintenance.  In the Top Customer view, the Year to Date field now excludes future-dated transactions that are in the same year. The new Business Insights Dashboard displays the information as of the date entered. If a date is not entered, the information is displayed as of the period-end date. Business Insights Reporter  You must activate the Business Insights module to use Business Insights Reporter.  When defining a role in Role Maintenance to provide users with access to Business Insights Reporter, select the Business Insights Reporter check box under Library Master > Setup Options. This check box was previously located under the Business Insights folder in Role Maintenance. Common Information Changes Bank Code Maintenance The Bank ID Number field in the Bank Code Maintenance window has been renamed Bank Account Number. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 65
  • 76. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Payroll Changes Payroll Changes Direct Deposits  In the Direct Deposit Interface Setup window, the account numbers can now only be viewed. The account numbers can be changed using Bank Code Maintenance.  The Space Rather Than Dash in the Word 'Pre-Note' check box is now available in the Direct Deposit Interface Setup window. Previously, this check box was in the Extended Solution's PR-1017 Setup Options window.  During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID (bank account) number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in the conversion log. Visual Integrator Changes Job Import You no longer need to run the VIWUD1 utility to update the data fields after you use Job Import to import Level 3.x jobs into Visual Integrator. This utility is now run automatically. Report Master Changes For printing reports from subsidiary modules that contain a general ledger account number greater than 20 characters, you will need to manually adjust the print position for the data fields following the account. This is because the maximum mask length in Report Master is 20 characters and that determines how much space Report Master defaults on the report. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 66
  • 77. Chapter 8 Workflow Changes in 4.20 Chapter 8 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.20 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module retirements. Global Changes Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) The ALE Conversion Utility has been renamed Lookup Conversion. Desktop  The Business Desktop has been renamed Sage 100 ERP Desktop.  The Modules tab has been renamed Tasks.  File layout and program information previously included in the Technical Reference and Support Guide is now accessible from the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page.  Tutorials have been moved to the new Tutorials page. Help System and Online Manuals  On the Contents tab of the Help system, the Module Help book contains links to individual Help systems for each module in Sage 100 ERP. Under each module’s main book, Help topics are further categorized into books of topics regarding procedures, information about printing forms and reports, and glossary terms. You can select any grouping of Help topics to print at one time, as well as print individual Help topics. For more information, see Print a Book of Help Topics in the Help system.  Also available on the Contents tab of the Help system is the Module PDFs book which contains links to individual PDFs for each module in Sage 100 ERP. These PDFs have been specially constructed to allow you to easily print the overview information for each task in a module. The PDFs are organized according to the menu structure of the module. For more information, see Print a Module PDF in the Help system. Inquiries The Accounts Receivable Inquiry, RMA Inquiry, and Sales Order Inquiry tasks are available. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 67
  • 78. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes Printing The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain in portrait format. Printing to a Dot Matrix Printer You can print to a dot matrix printer as long as the printer has a corresponding Windows printer driver and supports draft mode font to enable high-speed printing. A dot matrix form code is available for printing several forms. For more information, see Customize Dot Matrix Form Template in the Help system. Report Master Report Master is no longer available for modules using the Business Framework architecture. Library Master Changes Batch Faxing You can set up batch faxing for the following forms using Report Manager:         Statement Printing Accounts Receivable Invoice Printing Customer RMA Printing RMA Receiver Printing Sales Order Printing Picking Sheet Printing Sales Order Invoice Printing Purchase Order Printing Previously, batch faxing for these forms was set up in the Fax Form Definition window. To set up batch fax options for these forms, select Library Master Setup menu > Report Manager. In the Report Manager window, select a form and click the Maintain button. In the Maintain window, click the Maintain Fax Options button. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 68
  • 79. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes Role Maintenance  Roles set up to establish access to tasks, security events, and module options for modules other than Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order need to be verified after upgrading to version 4.40. New tasks, security events, and module options added for those modules are not selected for current roles after upgrading.  If you are upgrading from version 4.10, roles need to be verified for the Accounts Payable module and for the Accounts Receivable Inquiry, RMA Inquiry, and Sales Order Inquiry tasks. New tasks, security events, and module options added for this module are not selected for current roles after upgrading.  Override passwords previously maintained in Sales Order Options are now handled as security events in Role Maintenance.  ODBC Security will not be migrated when upgrading to version 4.20 and needs to be re-created. Renamed Task The FAS Link module has been renamed Fixed Assets. Reports  The .rpt files for reports on the Custom Reports menu now have a new folder structure. To use your existing customized report files with version 4.00 or higher, you must add the .rpt files to the Custom Reports menu using the Menu wizard in Report Manager. The .rpt file names must end with "custom.rpt" to be added using the Menu Wizard. To access the Menu Wizard, select Library Master Setup menu > Report Manager. In the Report Manager window, click Add Report to Menu.  The new folder structure for reports uses a combination of company code, task name, and form code or report setting name determined by the selections in the Add New Format window. Examples of the new folder structure are as follows:  For a specific company code, task name, and form code or report setting name: (...MAS90MAS_ABCReportsAR_InvoicePrintingINVOICESSTD *.rpt)  For a specific company code and task name and all form code or report setting names: (...MAS90MAS_ABCReportsAR_InvoicePrinting*.rpt) Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 69
  • 80. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes  For all companies and specific task name and form code or report setting names: (...MAS90MAS_SYSTEMReportsAR_InvoicePrinting INVOICESSTD*.rpt)  For all companies, specific task name, and all form code or report setting names: (...MAS90MAS_SYSTEMReportsAR_InvoicePrinting*.rpt) URL Maintenance You can use the URL Maintenance task to store URL information for the Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099s module. Two URL codes and descriptions were created for the Social Security Administration (SSA) and the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). Accounts Payable Changes Global Changes  Aging for all vendors is now recalculated using the system date during the conversion of version 4.20 and higher.  The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year.  Previously, historical data was stored by the period to date (PTD), year to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Accounts Payable vendor history is now stored by period by year. The conversion for vendor sales history is now performed as follows:  The PTD record is converted to the current period.  The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period (for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD amount should be in May).  The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the prior year.  You can modify the history data by clicking the Fix button on the Vendor Maintenance History tab. This button is available only when security is enabled and the Allow Editing of History Data in Vendor Maintenance security event is selected in Role Maintenance.  The Number of Months to Retain Check History option was removed. To retain or display check history in Vendor Maintenance, select the Track Detailed Invoice/Payment History check box in the Accounts Payable Options window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 70
  • 81. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes  You can now post payments of existing invoices to the general ledger in addition to payments of new invoices entered on the fly. Select the Manual Check Register in Detail check box in the Accounts Payable Options window.  Certain memos can now flow from entity to entity based on the document. For example, an invoice memo would flow to invoice history.  Time and Billing lines are no longer converted because they can cause out-of-balance invoice totals that do not match the line totals. If you have the Time and Billing module installed, contact your Sage business partner before installing the upgrade. Data Entry  In the Manual Check Entry window, you can now add multiple general ledger distribution lines using the Create G/L Distribution button.  The Credit Card Payment Transfer Details window displays transfer information for payments processed in version 4.20 and higher. Period End Processing  Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.  Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Only Remove Invoices with Zero Balances option has been replaced by the Remove Zero Balance Invoices task.  The Only Remove Temporary Vendors with Zero Balances option has been replaced by the Remove Temporary Vendors task.  The Only Clear Check History File option and the Purge Detailed Invoice/Payment History File options have been replaced by the Purge Accounts Payable History task.  The Purge Sales Tax History File option has been replaced by the Purge Sales Tax History task. Reports and Forms  Report setting options now appear on the header area of the applicable report window. You can also define and save customized report settings. For more information, see Create a Report Setting in the Help system.  Vendor Listing no longer prints the balance data. To print the balance information, print the new Vendor Listing with Balances. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 71
  • 82. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Payable Changes  You can now print the remit-to address on checks using A/P Check Printing or Manual Check Printing without customizing the check form.  Accounts Payable reports and listings now use SAP Crystal Reports. Because of this, the Accounts Payable module no longer uses the settings established in Library Master Report Format Maintenance.  The process for exporting or printing a report or listing to a file has changed. The Print to File option previously available in the Printer Setup window has been moved to the Export/E-mail option accessed from the Printer field and uses the SAP Crystal Reports engine. For more information on how to export or print reports to a file in these modules, see Export or Print to a File in the Help system.  The process for deferring the printing of a report or listing has changed. The Deferred option has been moved to the Deferred option accessed from the Printer field. This option was previously available in the Printer Setup window. For more information on how to defer the printing of a report in these modules, see Defer a Report in the Help system.  The font size on some reports was changed to allow the report to remain in portrait format.  Print jobs scheduled for deferred printing are now located at ...HomeDeferred. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  The Update Purchase Vendor task has been renamed Purchase Vendor Transfer.  Information that was previously on the Vendor Maintenance History tab has been moved to the Statistics and Summary tabs. History information is now maintained using period-sensitive data which removes the requirement for future buckets and mandatory module closing.  The Vendor Delete/Renumber/Merge task previously on the Setup menu has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and Change Vendors.  The Assign Vendor Schedules task previously on the Setup menu has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Assign Vendor Tax Schedules.  The Sales Tax Calculation task previously on the Setup menu has been moved to the Utilities menu. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 72
  • 83. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Accounts Receivable Changes Accounts Receivable Changes Memos Certain memos can now flow from entity to entity based on the document. For example, an invoice memo would flow to invoice history. Business Insights Changes Global Changes  After upgrading to version 4.20, you will need to re-create Business Insights Reporter reports used in a previous 4.x version of the software.  For custom reports previously created using version 4.10 or prior data from the Accounts Payable module, access Business Insights Reporter and select a report in the Business Insights Reporter Selection window. You are prompted to print the Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing and then delete the report. Repeat this process for each custom report previously created for the Accounts Payable module.  For custom reports previously created using version 4.05 or prior data from the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, General Ledger, Library Master, Return Merchandise Authorization, or Sales Order modules, access Business Insights Reporter and select a report in the Business Insights Reporter Selection window. You are prompted to print the Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing and then delete the report. Repeat this process for each custom report previously created for the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales Order modules.  NOTE For custom reports previously created for all other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Rebuild Business Insights Reporter Views to rebuild custom reports created with Business Insights Reporter in a previous 4.x version of the software. The Business Insights Reporter Definition Listing prints fields, sorts, and filters for the report you need to re-create. Business Insights Explorer The new Business Insights Explorer, which provides an alternative method of accessing data, is now available from the Desktop Tree view and menu. Predefined views of customers, quotes, sales orders, and invoices are available, providing a way to quickly view related data and navigational links to other inquiries or tasks. Renamed Tasks Under the Business Insights Dashboard menu, the following tasks have been renamed: Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 73
  • 84. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Common Information Changes  Business Insights Options has been renamed Dashboard Options.  Dashboard Selection Wizard (previously named Business Insights Wizard) has been renamed Dashboard Maintenance Wizard.  Dashboard Selection Listing (previously named Business Insights Listing) has been renamed Dashboard Maintenance Listing.  Display Business Insights has been renamed Display Dashboard.  Business Insights Automatic Update has been renamed Start Automatic Dashboard Update. Common Information Changes Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  Miscellaneous Item Maintenance has been added to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Receivable Setup menu and Sales Order Setup menu.  Bank Code Maintenance has been added to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Payable Setup menu, Accounts Receivable Setup menu, Bank Reconciliation Main menu, and Payroll Setup menu.  Memo Manager Maintenance, previously on the Library Master Setup menu, has been moved to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Payable Setup menu, Accounts Receivable Setup menu, General Ledger Setup menu, Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu, and Sales Order Setup menu.  Sales Tax Account Maintenance has been added to the Common Information Main menu. This task remains on the Accounts Payable Setup menu and Accounts Receivable Setup menu.  Purge Obsolete Extended Descriptions, previously on the Library Master Utilities menu, has been moved to the Common Information Utilities menu. Customizer Changes Global Changes  For modules using the Business Framework architecture, the External Link Definition window now allows you to select business object columns available to the panel instead of the control names in the customized library. For example, to select the Customer No. field in the Sales Order Entry window, you can now select the business object name, SO_SalesOrder_bus_CustomerNo$, instead of the control name, ML_CUST$. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 74
  • 85. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media Reporting)  Customized libraries for the Accounts Payable module must be re-customized.  Data entry user-defined fields (UDFs) must be re-created in User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance. After re-creating UDFs, you must map the UDFs to their respective history files. For more information, see Map User-Defined Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.  The Accounts Payable Invoice Entry UDFs for both header and lines will need to be re-created in User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance. After these UDFs have been created and updated, it is necessary to map the invoice entry UDFs to their respective history tables.  For Purchase Order Receipt of Goods, Receipt of Invoice, and Return of Goods, the new Purchase Order Invoice UDF replaces the Accounts Payable Invoice UDF. If an Accounts Payable Invoice UDF exists on a customized Purchase Order .lib file migrated or converted to 4.20, it must be manually removed, and the Purchase Order Invoice UDF must be added.  When you have upgraded to version 4.20 and re-created UDFs, the following list of UDFs are updated to specific tables:  The Accounts Payable Invoice UDFs are updated to the new AP Invoice History Header table.  The Accounts Payable Invoice Lines UDFs are updated to the new AP Invoice History Detail table.  The Accounts Payable Vendor UDFs are updated to the new AP Vendor Master table. Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099 (Magnetic Media Reporting) Global Changes  The Magnetic Media Reporting module has been renamed Electronic Reporting for W2 and 1099s to accurately reflect the new process required by the federal government.  Starting from the 2006 tax year, the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) requires that all payroll and 1099 filings be performed electronically through the Internet. The federal government will no longer accept W2 and 1099 information on any type of magnetic media (diskette). In Sage 100 ERP, you can continue to create a data file compliant with the IRS published standards and save it on the hard disk. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 75
  • 86. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Fixed Assets Changes  Some states may still require or accept filings submitted on magnetic media. If your state supports the Federal reporting format and accepts submissions on a diskette, you can create the state diskette by copying the data file you created to a 3.5" diskette. If your state does not support the Federal reporting format, the Electronic Reporting module cannot create your electronic file.  The new Electronic File Transfer task allows you to launch the appropriate government Web site to submit W2 and 1099 files.  You can store the URL information for Electronic Reporting in Library Master URL Maintenance. Two URL codes and descriptions were created for the Social Security Administration (SSA) and Internal Revenue Service (IRS).  The 1099 Magnetic Media Reporting window was renamed 1099 Electronic Reporting. The default disk drive to use is now C.  The W2 Magnetic Media Reporting window was renamed W2 Electronic Reporting. The default disk drive to use is now C.  The Mag Media Tax Type Code field in the Payroll Tax Table Maintenance window was renamed Electronic Reporting Tax Type Code. Fixed Assets Changes NOTE The Fixed Assets module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. Global Changes  The FAS Link module has been renamed Fixed Assets.  The new Fixed Assets Maintenance task is now available on the Fixed Assets Main menu if Sage Fixed Assets is installed and the Fixed Assets module is activated. Payroll Changes Taxes NOTE  In the Federal Tax Summary window, the Employee FICA Tips and Employer FICA Tips fields were added for wages. The Employee FICA Tip fields were added for payroll taxes.  In Manual Payroll Tax Entry window, the FICA Tip Tax field was added.  In Quarterly Tax Report window, the Print FICA Tip Data check box was added.  The Payroll module is not available for Sage 100 Premium ERP. The Mag Media Tax Type Code field in the P/R Tax Table Maintenance window was renamed Electronic Reporting Tax Type Code. The field name was changed to accurately reflect the new process required by the federal government. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 76
  • 87. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Visual Integrator Changes Reports To comply with new regulations regarding how Social Security tips are being reported, the following reports are modified to show FICA and FICA tips totals separately:            Quarterly Governmental Report Payroll Data Entry Audit Report Payroll Check History Report Employee Listing Perpetual History Report Employee Listing Employer's Expense Summary Quarterly Pay Period Recap Payroll Check Printing Direct Deposit Stub Printing Quarterly Tax Report Visual Integrator Changes Data Dictionary Listing File information for the Accounts Payable module is no longer included on the Data Dictionary Listing. To obtain file information for these modules, on the Desktop, access the Resources page and click the File Layouts and Program Information link. You must re-create Visual Integrator jobs for Accounts Payable. Import Job Maintenance If you select an Accounts Payable table for a new job in the V/I Import Job Selection window, corresponding tables are available for selection at the Table Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from any other module is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, corresponding files from Accounts Payable are available for selection at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window. Retired Modules The FAS Select module was retired. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 77
  • 88. Chapter 9 Workflow Changes in 4.10 Chapter 9 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.10 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module retirements. Accounts Receivable Changes Global Changes  Aging for all customers is now recalculated using the system date during the conversion of version 4.10 or higher data.  The updating of files is now based on the posting date. Previously, the General Ledger fiscal year was used to determine the period and year.  You can modify the history data by clicking the Fix button on the Customer Maintenance History tab. This button is only available when security is enabled and the Allow Editing of History Data in Customer Maintenance security event is selected in Role Maintenance.  Previously, the historical data was stored by period to date (PTD), year to date (YTD), last year, and future period. Accounts Receivable customer sales history is now stored by period by year. The conversion for customer sales history is now performed as follows: • The PTD record is converted to the current period. • The YTD record is converted to the period before the current period (for example, if the current period is June, then the total YTD amount should be in May). • The prior year record is converted to the last fiscal period of the prior year. Period End Processing  The Salesperson Commission Purge task, previously on the Period End menu, has been moved to the Utilities menu.  Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End Processing task accessed from the Period End menu.  Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Only Remove Temporary Customers with Zero Balances option has been replaced by the Remove Temporary Customers task.  The Only Remove Invoices with Zero Balances option has been replaced by the Remove Zero Balance Invoices task. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 78
  • 89. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Business Insights Changes  The Only Purge Sales Tax History File option has been replaced by the Purge Sales Tax History task.  The Only Clear Invoice/Shipping History File option has been replaced by the Purge Accounts Receivable History task.  The Only Recalculate Customer High Balances option has been replaced by the Recalculate Customer High Balances task. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks  Information that was previously on the Customer Maintenance History tab has been moved to the Customer Maintenance Statistics and Summary tabs. History information is now maintained using period-sensitive data which removes the requirement for future buckets and mandatory module closing.  The following tasks previously on the Setup menu have been moved to the Utilities menu: Global Customer Field Change, Sales Tax Calculation, and Internet Customers Enable/Purge.  The Delete/Renumber/Merge task previously on the Setup menu has been moved to the Utilities menu and renamed Delete and Change Customers. Business Insights Changes Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks The Business Insights tasks are now on a separate module menu. Previously, the Business Insights tasks were located in a menu under the Library Master module. Business Insights is now organized on two submenus: Dashboard and Reporter. Common Information Changes Miscellaneous Item Maintenance  Sales codes and miscellaneous items, part of the Accounts Receivable and Sales Order modules, are now referred to as Miscellaneous items and are stored in a common file shared by both modules.  Miscellaneous items are now designated by the following item types: Miscellaneous items, Charge items, and Comment items. Comment codes are now referred to as Comment items and Miscellaneous Charges are now referred to as Charge items. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 79
  • 90. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Customizer Changes Customizer Changes Global Changes  When upgrading from Level 3.7x, customized libraries for the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, General Ledger, eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales Order modules will not be migrated and must be re-created after the migration process.  After upgrading to Version 4.10, data entry UDFs must be re-created in User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance. After re-creating UDFs, you must map the UDFs to their respective history files. For more information, see Map User-Defined Fields (UDFs) in the Help system.  The link between the AR Invoice and Job Cost Header entity in Job Billing Entry has been replaced by a link between the Job Cost Billing entity and the Job Cost Header entity.  The Accounts Receivable and Sales Order Invoice Data Entry UDFs for both header and lines will need to be recreated in UDF and Table Maintenance. After these UDFs have been established and updated, it is necessary to map the invoice entry UDFs to their respective history files.  Job Cost Job Billing Entry has a new Job Cost Billing UDF that replaces the Accounts Receivable Invoice UDF. The Job Invoice UDF file is now the history file for Job Billing Entry’s Job Cost Billing UDF. The Accounts Receivable Invoice UDF is no longer available in Job Billing Entry. The ARI Entity UDF that exists on a customized lib and is migrated or converted to 4.10 will have to be manually removed from the 4.10 lib.  The Inventory Master file UDF has been merged into the CI_Item file. Use the Common Item File in User-Defined Field and Table Maintenance to create UDFs and maintain existing UDFs. The IM_90 file is no longer available. SAP Crystal Reports that previously used the IM_90 file should be modified to use the CI_Item file. The IM_90 UDF will need to be manually removed from the Inventory Maintenance .lib file.  In User-Defined Field Maintenance, pound signs (###) previously used in the Mask field for a String data type UDF are now invalid. When editing an existing UDF with a mask, the pound signs will be replaced with Z.s and any separators will need to be retyped. Pound signs are only valid for Numeric data type UDFs. For more information, see Format Masks in the Customizer Help system.  Previously, separators used in UDFs were saved to the applicable data files. In Version 4.10, separators are not saved. After upgrading to Version 4.10, use SAP Crystal Reports to reformat UDF data on custom reports. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 80
  • 91. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Customizer Changes  Conversion with AP Invoices in AP Invoice Data Entry will leave orphan records in the AP_95 that are assigned the invoice data entry sequence number. These records need to be manually removed using the Data File Display and Maintenance task. To identify orphan records, the sequence number in the key field for invoices removed during conversion will start with a 99900001, etc.  RA_91 UDFs will be added only to the Receipts History Header table. You will need to create new UDFs for the Receipts Header table, then go into the history table and map the new UDF to the existing UDF which was migrated.  RA_96 UDFs will be added only to the Receipts History Detail table. You will need to create new UDFs for the Receipts Detail table, then go into the history table and map the new UDF to the existing UDF which was migrated.  Pound signs (###) which were allowed for masking a String data type UDF are no longer allowed in Version 4.10 as this is an invalid format for a string (for more information, see String Format Table in the Help system). In Version 4.10, when editing a UDF with a Mask of #’s, the #’s are changed to Z’s. The separator will need to be re-added. Pound signs (###) are only allowed on Numeric data type UDFs.  For modules upgrading to 4.10, some modules wrote the Mask separator to the UDF data file. UDF values for 4.x modules are written without the separator. During the 4.10 conversion, separators included in the UDF records in the UDF data file will be removed. This will only occur for String data type UDFs.  When upgrading from a previous Version of 4.x, the following list of UDFs are updated to specific tables:  Accounts Receivable Invoice UDFs are updated to the AR Invoice History Header table.  Accounts Receivable Invoice Line UDFs are updated to the AR Invoice History Detail table.  The Sales Order Entry UDFs are updated to the SO Sales Order Header and the SO Sales Order History Header tables.  The Sales Order Detail UDFs are updated to the SO Sales Order Detail and the SO Sales Order History Detail tables.  The Return Merchandise Authorization Receipt Entry/History Header UDFs are updated to the RA Receipts History Header table.  The Return Merchandise Authorization Receipt Entry/History Lines UDFs are updated to the RA Receipts History Detail table. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 81
  • 92. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ eBusiness Manager Changes  The eBusiness Manager Customer UDFs are updated to the IT Shopping Cart Header and IT UID Customer Change tables.  The eBusiness Manager Shopping Cart Item UDFs are updated to the IT Shopping Cart Item and IT Shopping Cart Items Selected tables. eBusiness Manager Changes Global Changes  The Microsoft Web Publishing Wizard is no longer installed or supported. You must now publish eBusiness Manager images, JavaScripts, and style sheets to the Internet Information Server (IIS) using your own FTP software. For more information, see Publish Files to the Internet in the eBusiness Manager Help system.  The Publish Files to Web task, which was located on the Setup menu, has been removed as it used the Microsoft Web Publishing Wizard which is no longer supported.  The polling process that formerly performed the real-time automatic updates for user IDs, customers, and sales orders from the Sage Web Engine has been removed. The options that controlled how often the polling process polled for shopping cart entries and customer/user ID changes have therefore also been removed from IT Options.  You can no longer enter the SMTP server address in IT Options. It must be entered in Company Maintenance in the Library Master module before you can generate e-mail in eBusiness Manager. Return Merchandise Authorization Changes Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks Various options previously included in the RMA Utilities task have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Purge Expired RMAs option has been replaced by the Purge Expired RMA task.  The Purge Return Reason Detail option has been replaced by the Purge Return Reason Detail task.  The Purge RMA Receipts History option has been replaced by the Purge RMA Receipts History task.  The Create Customer Invoice Search Records option has been replaced by the Create Customer Invoice Search Records task. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 82
  • 93. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sales Order Changes Sales Order Changes Global Changes If the Inventory Management module is integrated with Sales Order, you can now retain a customer's last purchase price information for both inventory items and miscellaneous items. Previously, you could retain the last purchase price information for inventory items only. Sales History  Previously, sales history was saved by period and month. With version 4.10 and higher, sales history is now continuously saved by invoice date and posting date.  With version 4.10 and higher, you must retain at least two years of sales history at the Years to Retain Sales History field in the Sales Order Options window, with the option to retain up to 99 years.  Because of the new method for saving history, the Enter Customer Sales History Option by Customer Type check box and the Customer Type/Option fields in Sales Order Options have been removed. Sales History Reports NOTE These reports contain data as of the date of the conversion to 4.10 or higher. Because sales history is now saved by invoice date and posting date, four new reports, Sales Recap by Division, Sales Recap by Product Line, Sales Recap by Warehouse, and Sales Recap by Warehouse and Product Line replace the Monthly Recap by Division, Monthly Recap by Product Line, Monthly Recap by Warehouse, and Monthly Recap by Warehouse and Product Line reports. After upgrading to version 4.10 or higher, if you need to reference the Monthly Recap reports or the previous Customer Sales History report, select File > Run and type the following in the Run Program window:   SOWRJA to access the Monthly Recap by Product Line report SOWRKA to access the Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line report  SOWRLA to access the Monthly Recap by Warehouse report  SOWRMA to access the Monthly Recap by Division report  SOWRNA to access the Customer Sales History report Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 83
  • 94. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Sales Order Changes Period End Processing Only full period-end processing can be performed in the Period End Processing task accessed from the Period End menu. Various fields previously included in the Period End Processing window have been moved to the Utilities menu as follows:  The Purge Sales Order History option has been replaced by the Purge Order/Quote History task.  The Purge Expired Master/Repeating Orders and Purge Expired Price Quotes options have been replaced by the Purge Expired Orders/Quotes task.  The Purge Sales Order Recap option has been replaced by the Purge Sales Order Recap task. Job Cost Integration Because the Job Cost module can now be integrated with Sales Order, the way that job costs are posted can affect statements of profitability. If you are upgrading from version 4.05 or prior, make sure you plan how to post job costs before upgrading.  If job costs are posted from the Accounts Payable or Purchase Order module, do not select the Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost check box in the Sales Order Options window. If this check box is selected, costs can potentially be posted to the Job Cost module from more than one module, resulting in an understatement of profitability.  If the Accounts Payable or Purchase Order modules are not integrated with Job Cost, select the Post Invoice Costs to Job Cost check box in the Sales Order Options window. If this check box is not selected, costs may not be posted to the Job Cost module at all, resulting in an overstatement of profitability. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 84
  • 95. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Visual Integrator Changes Visual Integrator Changes Data Dictionaries After installing Version 4.10, before you use the Visual Integrator module, select Visual Integrator Main menu > Export Job Maintenance. This executes the necessary update of the Data Dictionaries so that you can successfully create Visual Integrator jobs. Data Dictionary Listing File information for the Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, and Sales Order modules is no longer included on the Data Dictionary Listing. To obtain file information for these modules, on the Desktop, access the Resources page and click the File Layouts and Program Information link. You must re-create Visual Integrator jobs for these modules. Import Job Maintenance When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job Maintenance, the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In the V/I Import Job Selection window, you can enter a new job name or select an existing job. For new jobs, you must select the table (previously referred to as File Name) for which the import will be prepared. After a table is selected, the Import Job Maintenance window appears. If an Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, Common Information, eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, or Sales Order table is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, only these tables are available for selection at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from a module other than Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, Common Information, eBusiness Manager, Return Merchandise Authorization, or Sales Order is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, files from any other module are available at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 85
  • 96. Chapter 10 Workflow Changes in 4.00 Chapter 10 This chapter describes the workflow changes incorporated in the product for the 4.00 release that you should be aware of. Installation and global changes are listed first followed by module retirements. Installation Changes NOTE Remote administration of the Application Server can be performed using a Terminal Services session because this functionality is not part of the Application Server.  The Sage 100 Advanced ERP Host and Host Enterprise Manager are no longer used for the Sage 100 Advanced ERP installation and are replaced by the Sage 100 Advanced ERP Application Server. For more information, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's Guide.  If you are upgrading from version 4.00,you must perform an in-place upgrade. Global Changes Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) You can now resize ALE windows. Desktop The Launcher has been renamed Business Desktop. Help System and Online Manuals The Help system has been expanded and updated to provide immediate access to all of the information previously found in the online PDF manuals. Upgrading Level 3.x Data The new file structures in versions 4.x provide flexibility for both Sage and development partners to make enhancements for you in the future. As a result, some steps must be taken to prepare your Level 3.x or 4.x data for migration to version 4.40.  During the migration process, user codes with leading blanks or special characters will not be migrated. You will need to re-create these user codes after the migration process. After upgrading your data, print and review the System Conversion log. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 86
  • 97. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes Module and Accounting Dates  The Library Master module now uses the Windows system date.  Your date formats are now based on the Windows Regional Settings from your workstation for consistency across your entire desktop. Therefore, the default settings for Year Display Format and Year 2000 Default have been removed. The software does not support the "year first" Windows date format. If you enter a two-digit year, the century is determined by the century preferences setting in the Windows Regional Settings for your workstation.  The F6 functionality which allowed you to toggle between a 2-digit year (05/31/10) and a 4-digit year (05/31/2010) has been removed to accommodate the Windows Regional Settings. Registering Your Modules You now have 45 days to access unregistered modules. Previously, you could access the module 40 times only. Security WARNING After security is enabled, it cannot be disabled. Version 4.00 introduced a new security model, which is role based rather than menu based. Security in your Level 3.x software will not be migrated to your version 4.40 software; however, you can choose to migrate users from your Level 3.x software to your version 4.40 software, if you select the Standard Security option during installation. To enable security, refer to your Installation and System Administrator's Guide. When All is selected at the Operand field, the operand now changes automatically based on the Value fields entered. If you enter the first Value field only, the operand changes to Equal to, then if you enter the second Value field, the operand changes to Range. Library Master Changes Changed Tasks  Reports, registers, and journals in the General Ledger, Library Master, and Customizer modules and the Daily Transaction Register from subsidiary modules except for Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, and Work Order are now SAP Crystal Reports files. As a result, printers defined in Device Configurator no longer apply to printing these documents. Use a Windows printer for printing the documents.  The Data File Display and Maintenance task has been enhanced with a new program. The new program determines if data is for Level 3.x or version 4.x. A new field lists the different secondary keys available and sorts the records in the file being displayed according to the key selected. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 87
  • 98. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Library Master Changes Companies A Copy button has been added to Company Maintenance, allowing you to copy data and forms from an existing company. As a result, the SVFCPY and SVDATA utilities have been removed. Renamed, Removed, or Moved Tasks NOTE  Information from the Preferences task has been moved to the User Maintenance, Company Maintenance, and System Configuration tasks. As a result, the Preferences task has been removed.  Information from the Alternate Directory Maintenance task has been moved to the Change Data Location dialog box, which is accessed by clicking Change Data Location on the Company Maintenance Preferences tab. As a result, the Alternate Directory Maintenance task has been removed.  The Role Maintenance task replaces the Menu Security Maintenance task.  The functionality of the Resize Data Files task has been incorporated into the Rebuild Application Key Files task. As a result, the Resize Data Files task has been removed.  The System Activity Log has been renamed Activity Log.  The Uninstall Modules task has been added to the System Configuration task.  The Chat functionality has been removed from the Master Console task.  The functionality of the Visual Explorer task has been added to the right-click menu accessed from the Sage 100 ERP Desktop Tree View. As a result, the Visual Explorer task has been removed. For more information, see Open a Task in a Secondary Company in the Help system.  Registration information from the Product Registration Maintenance task has been moved to the System Configuration task. As a result, the Product Registration Maintenance task has been removed.  The Installed Modules Listing on the Library Master Reports menu replaces the *part utility.  For information about changes to the date format settings that previously resided in the Preferences task, See Module and Accounting Dates on page 87. The following Library Master tasks have been removed because they are no longer needed: • Convert Evolution/2 Data Files • Data Dictionary Transfer • Maintain Explorer Menu Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 88
  • 99. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Business Insights Changes • Rebuild Alternate Directory Pointers • Task Menu Maintenance • SVMUPD, SVFCPY, and SVDATA utilities Business Insights Changes Business Insights Reporter The Business Insights Reporter menu includes the tasks, Business Insights Reporter, and Business Insights Reporter Listing. You can use Business Insights Reporter to create SAP Crystal Reports forms and reports for all modules. These reports can optionally be added to the Custom Reports menu for a specified module. Customizer Changes Global Changes  When upgrading to Version 4.00, General Ledger user-defined fields will be updated to the GL_Account data file; however, General Ledger library customizations will not be migrated and must be re-created after the migration process.  The PostMaster Conversion Utility previously accessed from the Customizer Main menu has been removed because the PostMaster module has been retired. General Ledger Changes Accounts The ability to have a general ledger account number of up to 32 characters and 10 segments means that the way in which accounts are maintained has changed. The main account (also known as the natural account) is now maintained separately from the other individual segments. As a result, the system has changed in the following ways:  The copy function is no longer available in Account Maintenance. The copy function is now available in Main Account Maintenance and Sub Account Maintenance.  The process for creating new accounts in Account Maintenance has changed. To create an account in Account Maintenance, you must enter a valid combination of an existing main account and sub accounts. For more information, see Create and Maintain Accounts in Account Maintenance in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 89
  • 100. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ General Ledger Changes  Options that control how general ledger accounts can be created and added on the fly have changed in General Ledger Options. The Add new accounts from data entry check box has been removed and replaced with the Auto Create when all Segments are Valid field, Add Main Accounts in General Ledger check box, and Add Sub Accounts in General Ledger check box. For more information about these fields, see General Ledger Options in the Help system. Allocations To support new features in allocations, as well as to make the terminology more intuitive, the following changes were made in the system:  The Allocation Maintenance task has been renamed Allocation Entry. The Allocation Entry task is accessed by selecting General Ledger Main menu > Allocation Entry.  The Allocation Entry task has been renamed Manual Allocation Entry. The Manual Allocation Entry task is accessed by selecting General Ledger Main menu > General Journal Entry. In the General Journal Entry window, click Copy From. In the Copy From window, select the Allocation option and click OK.  The method of calculating masked allocation distributions has changed. The allocation is now calculated first, then the total amount is distributed to all the accounts that match the masked account. Previously, the allocation percent/quantity entered was distributed to each account that matched the masked account.  The activity or balance for Period, Quarterly, and Annual allocation cycles is now allocated based on the entire selected cycle rather than just the period ending that cycle. For example, now a quarterly allocation distributes the activity for the entire quarter. Previously, quarterly and annual allocations used the activity for the current period as the allocation amount. For example, previously a quarterly allocation generated at the end of the third period used only the activity for period 3, not the activity for periods 1, 2, and 3.  In Allocation Selection, there are now separate allocation totals for financial and nonfinancial allocations. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 90
  • 101. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ General Ledger Changes Custom Financials In order to have maximum flexibility and customization capabilities, you should use Sage Management Intelligence (SMI) for your custom financial reporting needs; however, Sage recognizes that you may have expended considerable time and effort in creating custom financial reports and want to continue using them. Although the Custom Financials menu has been removed, it can still be accessed by using a hidden utility, as long as you do not expand your general ledger account beyond nine characters and three segments.  You can access the Custom Financials menu and tasks by selecting File > Run and typing *unhidegl in the Run Program window.  The Custom Financials tasks can only be accessed if you have general ledger account numbers with nine or fewer characters and three or fewer segments. Standard Financials The Standard Financial Statements have been renamed Financial Reports and have been enhanced to include the former Monthly Trend Report. Data Entry  The system now calculates beginning balances for each fiscal year based on prior year data. As a result, the Beginning Balance (BB) source journal has been removed. To post beginning balances for a new company, you must enter them as journal entries to your general ledger accounts and update them.  In Transaction Journal Entry, the logic for the offset postings has changed. The Debit/Credit field has been renamed Offset field. During conversion, the source journal orientation will be changed to Credit if it was previously Debit, and it will be changed to Debit if it was previously Credit. Previously, the value selected at the Debit/Credit field determined the orientation of the lines. Now the value selected at the Offset field determines the orientation of the offset only.  When you use General Ledger Exchange to import transactions into the General Ledger module, transactions now import to the General Journal Entry files. Previously, transactions were imported directly to the history files. This change was made because of the large number of inter-related tables that must be updated and linked when each transaction is posted. After the import is complete, the General Journal must be printed and updated. NOTE For information about changes to customizations for General Ledger lookups, See Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) on page 38. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 91
  • 102. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ General Ledger Changes Period End Processing Many of the functions previously found in Period End Processing have been moved. Only full period-end processing can be performed from this task. In addition, to support the reopening and closing of periods, the Fiscal Year Consolidation and Consolidate Detail Records logic has been removed. Previously, you could perform the following tasks from Period End Processing:  Full period-end processing  Consolidate General Ledger Detail Records  Purge Transaction Detail History  Purge Period Summary History The new location of various functions follows:  The Clear Next Year Current Budgets logic is now performed in Budget Maintenance.  The Purge Transaction Detail History task has been renamed Purge General Ledger History and is now accessible from the General Ledger Utilities menu.  Journal and register numbers are now reset separately based on the selections at the Reset Journal Numbers During and Reset Register Numbers During fields in the General Ledger Options window. The following changes have been made to year-end processing:  The Years to Retain General Ledger History field in the General Ledger Options window now applies to both summary and detail history information. As a result, the Number of Years to Retain Summary History field in the General Ledger Options window has been removed.  The Posting to Retained Earnings and Updating Beginning Balances logic has been removed as this is now done through the data entry update routines and the Daily Transaction Register. If the next fiscal year has not been created, year-end processing will create the next fiscal year and recalculate beginning balances.  Zero budget accounts are now removed from the Period Budget Detail file when all periods for any year are zero.  The Copy Budget at Year End option has been modified to use the new Copy Actual to Default Budget at Year End check box in the General Ledger Options window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 92
  • 103. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Visual Integrator Changes Reports  The Budget and History Report has been separated into two reports, the Budget and History Report and the Budget and History Report by Period.  The Standard Financial Statements have been renamed Financial Reports. The Financial Reports now include the former Monthly Trend Report. Renamed and Removed Tasks  To provide more flexibility in giving users access to tasks, the Account Inquiry task is now a security event. To give users access to Account Inquiry, use Library Master Role Maintenance to set up users with View Only access to Account Maintenance.  The Account Maintenance task has been removed from all subsidiary modules because all installations require the General Ledger module.  The Account Group Maintenance task replaces the Account Break Maintenance task. In Version 4.00, the term account group is now used in place of account break.  The Sub Account Maintenance task replaces the Department Maintenance task. Visual Integrator Changes Data Dictionaries After installing Version 4.00, before you use the Visual Integrator module, select Visual Integrator Main menu > Export Job Maintenance. This executes the necessary update of the Data Dictionaries so that you can successfully create Visual Integrator jobs. Data Dictionary Listing General Ledger files are no longer available in the Data Dictionary Listing (Visual Integrator Main menu > Data Dictionary Listing). Instead, use the Technical Reference and Support Guide (TRSG) for a listing of General Ledger files. Import Job Maintenance  When you select Visual Integrator Main menu > Import Job Maintenance, the new window, V/I Import Job Selection appears. In the V/I Import Job Selection window, you can enter a new job name or select an existing job. For new jobs, you must select the table (previously referred to as File Name) for which the import will be prepared. After a table is selected, the Import Job Maintenance window appears. If a General Ledger table is selected in the V/I Import Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 93
  • 104. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Retired Modules Job Selection window, only General Ledger tables are available for selection at the Table Name field (previously called File Name field) in the Import Job Maintenance window. If a table from a module other than General Ledger is selected in the V/I Import Job Selection window, files from all modules other than General Ledger are available at the File Name field in the Import Job Maintenance window.  In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a General Ledger job the Records tab is no longer available because there are no record types in General Ledger. Also, the Validation tab is no longer available because validation is done by the system. When you create a job for a module other than General Ledger in the Import Job Maintenance window, the Records tab and Validation tab are available.  In the Import Job Maintenance window, when you create a General Ledger job, you cannot test or execute the import job until your system administrator gives you the rights to execute the job in Role Maintenance. Previously, system security did not prevent you from immediately executing General Ledger jobs. Export Jobs You can no longer export General Ledger jobs using Export Job Maintenance. Instead, select General Ledger Utilities menu > General Ledger Exchange to export General Ledger jobs. You can still export jobs from any module other than General Ledger using Export Job Maintenance. Retired Modules The following modules were retired:      Client Write-Up (If you need Client Write-Up functionality, contact your Sage business partner) Import Master PostMaster TimeSlips Link Visual PostMaster Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 94
  • 105. Appendix A Checklists Appendix A Before beginning the installation, test and validate all the hardware and network configurations using the following:  The Installation and System Administrator's Guide, which can be found by selecting a product from the installation Autorun screen, and then clicking Documentation on the product screen. The guide is in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format.  The Supported Platform Matrix, which can be found on the Support page on the Sage Customer Portal at: https://customers.sagenorthamerica.com  The current support library for any pertinent information, particularly the Hot Pre-Installation Information page, which can be found on the Support page on the Sage Customer Portal at: https://customers.sagenorthamerica.com Upgrade and Conversion Process The upgrade process consists of three steps: 1 Preparing your data for upgrading 2 Upgrading your data to version 2014 3 Converting your data to version 2014 This appendix contains the information you will need to upgrade and convert your data based on the version of your data. Proceed to the applicable section as follows:         Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 on page 96 Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 on page 102 Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 on page 108 Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 on page 113 Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 on page 120 Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 on page 128 Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 on page 136 Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 on page 143 Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 95
  • 106. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Even if the Sage CRM installation integrated with your Sage 100 ERP 2013 installation has already been upgraded to version 7.2, there are steps you must follow to make the database compatible with version 2014. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 2013 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 2013 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ Rebuild all data files. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade.  If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, use the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities.  If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP, use the Rebuild Sort File utility. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 5____ Print all customized form definitions. 6____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 96
  • 107. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 96, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. 1____ In your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 2013 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears, no action is required. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP 2013 to Sage 100 Premium ERP 2014, follow the steps below. When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf and MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is required for the initial migration. Also, include the company databases and log files for each company that you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC company, copy the MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf databases. a Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases installed in your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System database. b In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that you will migrate from your 2013 installation to your 2014 installation. c In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases and the related database transaction logs from the 2013 ..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014 ..MSSQLData folder. d In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the 2014 installation and reattach them to the 2013 installation. e On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration. f Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 97
  • 108. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 3____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 4____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 5____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 6____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Data Conversion Checklist After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 96 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 97, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. 3____ If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 98
  • 109. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 4____ If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server Options, and update the following information as needed.  Integration server port ID  Sage CRM SQL server name  Sage CRM SQL database name The server name and database name should reference the mirror installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP 2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data. 5____ 6____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 8____ Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 9____ Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. 7____ NOTE Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 99
  • 110. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 10____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 11____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import and export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 12____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 13____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 14____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. 15____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 16____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 100
  • 111. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 2013 to Version 2014 17____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 18____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 19____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 20____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 21____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 22____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 101
  • 112. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.50 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 4.50 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you use credit card processing, verify that you have a valid credit card encryption key in Company Maintenance for proper conversion of credit card data. 5____ Rebuild all data files. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade.  If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, use the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities.  If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP, use the Rebuild Sort File utility. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 102
  • 113. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 102, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. 1____ NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. In your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.50 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears, no action is required. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Premium ERP 4.50 to Sage 100 Premium ERP 2014, follow the steps below. When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf and MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is required for the initial migration. Also, include the company databases and log files for each company that you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC company, copy the MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf databases. a Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases installed in your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System database. b In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that you will migrate from your 4.50 installation to your 2014 installation. c In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases from the 4.50 ..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014 ..MSSQLData folder. d In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the 2014 installation and reattach them to the 4.50 installation. e On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration. f Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard. 3____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 103
  • 114. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 4____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 5____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 6____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Data Conversion Checklist After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 102 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 103, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information, see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 104
  • 115. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. 4____ If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server Options, and update the following information as needed.  Integration server port ID  Sage CRM SQL server name  Sage CRM SQL database name The server name and database name should reference the mirror installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP 2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data. 5____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. 6____ If you have customers with national accounts and credit cards are assigned to the sold-to customers, review those records to determine whether the credit card information should be manually transferred to the bill-to customer. 7____ If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. 8____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 9____ Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 105
  • 116. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. NOTE Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import and export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 106
  • 117. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.50 to Version 2014 15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. 16____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 17____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 18____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 19____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 20____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 21____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 22____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 23____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 107
  • 118. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 Before upgrading your data to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation and run the Parallel Migration utility from the Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.45 data for upgrade. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. Several steps should be completed by a SQL Server® administrator. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 4.45 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Sort File utility. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 5____ Print all customized form definitions. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on this page, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. When performing these steps, include your MAS_System.mdf and MAS_System_log.ldf databases. Upgrading system files is required for the initial migration. Also, include the company databases and log files for each company that you want to migrate. For example, to migrate ABC company, copy the MAS_ABC.mdf and MAS_ABC_log.ldf databases. 1____ In you version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path for your version 4.45 system. This utility backs up some system files in your new installation before they are overwritten by the upgrade process. It is critical that this step is completed before performing any data upgrade steps. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 108
  • 119. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 2____ Use SQL Server Management Studio to delete the databases in your 2014 installation, including the MAS_System database. 3____ In SQL Server Management Studio, detach the databases that you will migrate from your 4.45 installation to your 2014 installation. 4____ In Windows Explorer, copy the detached databases from the 4.45 ..MSSQLData folder and paste them into the 2014 ..MSSQLData folder. 5____ In SQL Server Management Studio, attach the databases to the 2014 installation and reattach them to the 2013 installation. 6____ On the server where version 2014 is installed, in the Sage program group on the Start menu, select Parallel Migration. 7____ Follow the steps in the Parallel Migration Wizard. 8____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 9____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. 10____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 11____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Data Conversion Checklist After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 108 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 108, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 109
  • 120. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information, see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help system. If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. 4____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. 5____ If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. 6____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 7____ If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 110
  • 121. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 8____ Test your modified SAP Crystal reports and forms. Use SAP Crystal Reports Designer to modify reports as needed. You must either be logged on using a Windows account that has read access to the applicable SQL Server database, or you must have a separate SQL Server authenticated logon ID and password. Integrated Security is used by default; if your Windows account does not have rights to the database, a logon dialog box appears, allowing you to enter a different logon ID and password for database access. Before modifying forms or the standard Crystal reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. 9____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 10____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 11____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 12____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. 13____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 14____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 15____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 16____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 111
  • 122. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.45 to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014 17____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 18____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 19____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 20____ Test all printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 21____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 112
  • 123. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 When upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.40 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 4.40 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you are upgrading from version 4.40 Product Update 4 and higher, verify that you have a valid credit card encryption key in Company Maintenance for proper conversion of credit card data. 5____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 113
  • 124. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 113, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. 1____ NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.40 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. It is critical that you address everything listed in the Pre Migration window before you proceed to the next step. If nothing appears, no action is required. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014, Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data. 3____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 4____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 5____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 6____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 114
  • 125. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 Data Conversion Checklist After completing the steps in the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 113 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 114, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information, see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help system. If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. 4____ If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server Options, and update the following information as needed.  Integration server port ID  Sage CRM SQL server name Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 115
  • 126. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014  Sage CRM SQL database name The server name and database name should reference the mirror installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP 2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data. 5____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. 6____ If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. 7____ If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. 8____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 9____ Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. NOTE Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 116
  • 127. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. 16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 117
  • 128. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 20____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 21____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 22____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 23____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 24____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 25____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 118
  • 129. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.40 to Version 2014 26____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 119
  • 130. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 When to upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.30 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 4.30 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you use credit card processing and are upgrading from version 4.30 Service Update 18 through 23, verify that you have a valid credit card encryption key in Company Maintenance for proper conversion of credit card data. 5____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system. 8____ If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report, Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no longer available beginning with version 4.10. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 120
  • 131. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 9____ If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each report. For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport, CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales." For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system. 10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 120, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. 1____ NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.30 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and Transaction Detail files.  NOTE The quantities in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files must match before you can upgrade your data to version 2014. To fix the files, in your version 4.30 data, use Inventory Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance. b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files.  Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.  To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility. c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory quantities. Run this utility for each warehouse.  Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide  In the Action column, select the action to perform for each item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type. 121
  • 132. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014  If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, in the Action column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity. After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these valuation methods.  If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this utility for those valuation methods.  For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in the Help system. d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014, Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data. 3____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 4____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 5____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 6____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 122
  • 133. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 Data Conversion Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 120 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 121, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information, see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help system. If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. 4____ If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server Options, and update the following information as needed.  Integration server port ID  Sage CRM SQL server name Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 123
  • 134. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014  Sage CRM SQL database name The server name and database name should reference the mirror installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP 2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data. 5____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. Re-customize the customized libraries for the Bar Code, Bill of Materials, Inventory Management, and Purchase Order modules. 6____ 7____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 9____ NOTE If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. 8____ Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 124
  • 135. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 125
  • 136. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. 17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 20____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in the conversion log. 21____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 22____ Compare the following version 4.30 and 2014 reports because sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report. 23____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 24____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 25____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 26____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 126
  • 137. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.30 to Version 2014 27____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 28____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 127
  • 138. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 When to upgrading to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, you must follow the instructions for upgrading Sage CRM in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators Guide. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.20 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a backup of your version 4.20 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the 1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports, perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing. 5____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system. 8____ If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report, Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no longer available beginning with version 4.10. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 128
  • 139. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 9____ If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each report. For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport, CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales." For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system. 10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 128, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. 1____ NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.20 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and Transaction Detail files.  To fix the files, in your version 4.20 data, use Inventory Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance. b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files.   NOTE The quantities in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files must match before you can upgrade your data to version 2014. Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail. To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility. c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory quantities. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide  Run this utility for each warehouse.  At the Action column, select the action to perform for each item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type. 129
  • 140. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014  If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity. After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these valuation methods.  If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this utility for those valuation methods.  For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in the Help system. d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014, Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data. 3____ If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your server. 4____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 5____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 6____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 7____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 130
  • 141. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 Data Conversion Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 128 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 129, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Verify that credit card processing is enabled for each company in Company Maintenance if credit cards were previously being processed using Sage Payment Solutions. For more information, see Set Up the Credit Card Processing Module in the Help system. If you were not processing transactions through Sage Payment Solutions but plan to start doing so, contact your Sage Payment Solutions account executive to convert the Sage Exchange Vault-only account created during conversion to a processing account. 4____ If your system is integrated with Sage CRM, go into CRM Server Options, and update the following information as needed.  Integration server port ID  Sage CRM SQL server name Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 131
  • 142. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014  Sage CRM SQL database name The server name and database name should reference the mirror installation that you created for integration with Sage 100 ERP 2014. For more information on this process, refer to the Installing Sage CRM chapter in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrator’s Guide. After updating the information, load the Sage CRM data. 5____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order. 6____ 7____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 9____ NOTE If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. 8____ Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 10____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 132
  • 143. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 11____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. 12____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 13____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 14____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 15____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 133
  • 144. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 16____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. 17____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 18____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 19____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 20____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in the conversion log. 21____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 22____ Compare the following version 4.20 and 2014 reports because sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report. 23____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 24____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 25____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 26____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 134
  • 145. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.20 to Version 2014 27____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 28____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 135
  • 146. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 Prior to upgrading your version 4.10 data to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.10 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a copy of your version 4.10 MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the 1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports, perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing. 5____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system. 8____ If you had historical data prior to version 4.10, print the following Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report, Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no longer available beginning with version 4.10. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 136
  • 147. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 9____ If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each report. For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport, CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales." For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system. 10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 136, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. 1____ NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.10 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and Transaction Detail files.  To fix the files, in your version 4.10 data, use Inventory Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance. b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files.   NOTE The quantities in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files must match before you can upgrade your data to version 2014. Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail. To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility. c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory quantities. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide  Run this utility for each warehouse.  At the Action column, select the action to perform for each item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type. 137
  • 148. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014  If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity. After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these valuation methods.  If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this utility for those valuation methods.  For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in the Help system. d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014, Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data. 3____ If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your server. 4____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 5____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 6____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 7____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 138
  • 149. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 Data Conversion Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 136 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 137, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Update customized panels, by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order. 4____ If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 139
  • 150. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 5____ Verify that all module links are functional by selecting Library Master Utilities menu > Link Maintenance Utility. Links that appear in red are broken and will need to be fixed using the Relink button in Link Maintenance Utility. For more information on relinking files, see Copy/Move/Relink Files in your Help system. 6____ If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. 7____ Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 8____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. NOTE If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 9____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 140
  • 151. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 10____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 11____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 12____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 13____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. 14____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. 15____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 16____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 17____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. 18____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in the conversion log. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 141
  • 152. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.10 to Version 2014 19____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 20____ Compare the following version 4.10 and 2014 reports because sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report. 21____ If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 22____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 23____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 24____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 25____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 26____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 142
  • 153. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 Prior to upgrading your version 4.00 or 4.05 data to version 2014, you must perform a parallel installation. Use the Pre-Migration and Parallel Migration utilities from the Library Master Utilities menu to upgrade your data. For more information, consult with your Sage business partner. If you have custom modules or modifications to any of your modules, consult your Sage business partner or development partner prior to beginning the upgrade process. Pre-Upgrade Checklist You must prepare your version 4.00 or 4.05 data for upgrading. This should be done for each company you plan to upgrade. 1____ Process all pending credit card transactions. 2____ Print and update all journals and registers. Failure to do so may result in loss of data. 3____ Create a copy of your version 4.x MAS90 folder, which includes data for all of your companies. Perform this step following your usual backup process. For specific support on how to back up your data, refer to manuals for your backup software or contact the vendor from whom you purchased that product. 4____ If you plan to use Federal and State eFiling and Reporting for the 1099 forms, W-2 forms, 941 forms, and governmental reports, perform the conversion to version 2014 after the quarter end and before the first payroll in the current quarter to avoid values being placed in the wrong boxes on some forms. If conversion is performed mid-quarter, some data may require editing. 5____ Rebuild all data files using the Rebuild Key Files and Rebuild Sort File utilities. You must answer Yes to all recalculation questions. 6____ Print all customized form definitions. 7____ Correct and apply all negative tiers before upgrading. For more information, see Correct Negative Tiers in the Help system. 8____ Print the following Sales Order History reports: Customer Sales History Report, Monthly Recap by Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse/Product Line Report, Monthly Recap by Warehouse Report, Monthly Recap by Division Report. These reports are no longer available beginning with version 4.10. NOTE You must print and update all journals and registers to prevent possible data loss during data upgrade. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 143
  • 154. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 9____ If you created reports using Business Insights Reporter, review the report names in the Business Insights Reporter selection window. If there are multiple reports with similar names, copy the reports within Business Insights Reporter and rename each report. For example, if you have reports named CustomerSalesReport, CustomerSalesReport2, and CustomerSalesReport3, copy CustomerSalesReport2 as "SalesReportForCustomers" and CustomerSalesReport3 as "ReportForCustomerSales." For more information, see Copy a Report in the Help system. 10____ If you are using eBusiness Manager, back up any templates, .htm files, and the IW folder before uninstalling the previous version of the Web Engine. Upgrade Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 143, you are now ready to migrate your data to your version 2014 system. NOTE The tasks that appear in the Pre Migration window are based on the version of your data. 1____ From your version 2014 installation, select Library Master Utilities menu > Pre Migration, and then enter the source path and company code for your version 4.00 or 4.05 system. Run the reports and utilities that appear. a Select Item Code Validation Report to display missing item codes from your Warehouse Detail, Item Costing, and Transaction Detail files.  To fix the files, in your version 4.00 or 4.05 data, use Inventory Management Main menu > Inventory Maintenance. b Select Inventory File Comparison Report to compare the quantity in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files.  Run this report by warehouse and save as an audit trail.  NOTE The quantities in your warehouse, tier, and transaction inventory data files must match before you can upgrade your data to version 2014. To correct any quantities, run the Inventory Balancing Utility. c Select Inventory Balancing Utility to balance your inventory quantities. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide  Run this utility for each warehouse.  At the Action column, select the action to perform for each item, or apply a specific action based on valuation type. 144
  • 155. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014  If the valuation is LIFO, FIFO, Lot, or Serial, at the Action column select Skip if the tier quantities are incorrect. You must perform a physical count to correct the tier quantity. After the tier quantity is correct, run this utility for these valuation methods.  If the valuation is Average Cost or Standard Cost and the warehouse and transaction quantities are incorrect, you must perform a physical count to correct the warehouse quantity. After the warehouse quantity is correct, run this utility for those valuation methods.  For more information, see Balance Inventory Quantities in the Help system. d Run all Inventory Pre Migration tasks again to ensure corrections were made. Keep all reports as an audit trail. 2____ If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, select Library Master Utilities menu > Parallel Migration to upgrade your data. If you are upgrading to Sage 100 Premium ERP version 2014, Select Windows Start menu > All Programs > Sage program group > Parallel Migration Wizard to upgrade your data. 3____ If you are printing bar codes, ensure that the Azalea fonts are installed on the workstation. The fonts can be installed from the WkSetupAzalea folder where Sage 100 ERP is installed on your server. 4____ When you launch Sage 100 ERP, log on as Administrator, review the security for your users, and set up and assign the appropriate roles to your users using tasks accessed through the Administrative Tools window. 5____ Review security tasks for new features in version 2014. Review ODBC security if it is used. 6____ If you are using Unified Logon and you upgraded your system files, you must add the following statement on one workstation SOTA.ini: Logon=Yes. 7____ If you customized your Desktop, review the customizations on the Custom toolbar. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 145
  • 156. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 Data Conversion Checklist After completing the Pre-Upgrade Checklist on page 143 and the Upgrade Checklist on page 144, you are now ready to convert your data to version 2014. 1____ If your company data contains credit card information, verify that the workstation you are using has a working Internet connection to automatically install the Sage Exchange Desktop and transfer credit card records to a Sage Exchange Vault account during conversion. Credit card records must be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account before company data can be converted. 2____ Select Library Master Main menu > Company Maintenance to convert your data to version 2014. This must be done for each of your companies. If your data contains credit card records that will be transferred to a Sage Exchange Vault account, the Credit Card Conversion To Sage Exchange Vault Time Estimate window appears. This window provides an estimate of how long it will take to transfer the credit card data. This estimate is based on benchmark test results, but results will vary based on Internet connection speed, network traffic, and the number of customer credit card records stored in your system. You may be able to decrease the estimate by updating credit card transactions and purging credit card data. If this window appears, click Yes to proceed with data conversion or click No to stop the conversion process. Additional time is required to convert company data after the credit card records are transferred; that time is not included in the estimate shown on the window. 3____ Update customized panels by selecting Custom Office Utilities menu > Update Customized Panels to Current Level. Review the placement of all user-defined fields. For more information, See Customizer Changes on page 47. Re-customize the customized libraries for all modules other than Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Bank Reconciliation, eBusiness Manager, General Ledger, Job Cost, Material Requirements Planning, Payroll, Return Merchandise Authorization, Sales Order, TimeCard, and Work Order. 4____ If you have customized Advanced Lookup Engine (ALE) lookups, after converting to the new version of the software and prior to accessing other modules, select Library Master Utilities menu > Lookup Conversion to convert your lookups. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 146
  • 157. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 5____ If you had the Extended Solution for customers with national accounts and the Populate Bill Address Block with ’Bill To’ Customer Block check box was selected in AR-1068 Setup Options, you must run the Sales Order Bill To Address Fix Utility (select File menu > Run, then type *Utl) to populate the sales order bill-to address information with the bill-to customer’s address information. 6____ Review your Payroll Tax Tables. Installing the Payroll Tax Table Update replaces all of your current state and federal tax tables with new tables unless you have specifically excluded a state tax table from the update by selecting the Exclude this Table from Tax Update check box in Tax Table Maintenance. Local tax information is not updated. 7____ Test your customized Crystal reports and forms. NOTE If you need to troubleshoot issues with customized reports and forms, run the Crystal Form Comparison Report utility to compare your customized reports and forms to the standard ones in version 2014. Before modifying the graphical forms or reports found on the Custom Reports menu, you must be proficient in the use of SAP Crystal Reports. To run the utility, select File menu > Run, and then type SYWFCU. The utility tells you which tables, if any, have been added to a report or form. It does not provide information about formatting changes, such as those affecting fonts, logos, and so forth. If you were previously using non-graphical forms, you will need to set them up using SAP Crystal Reports. If you are using Sage 100 Standard ERP or Sage 100 Advanced ERP, use the Crystal Reports Conversion Wizard to convert your Crystal reports and forms. For more information, see SAP Crystal Reports FAQs in the Help system. If you do not run the wizard now, it will automatically run the first time that someone runs a form or report. If you are using Sage 100 Premium ERP, refer to the Converting Reports for Sage 100 Premium ERP section in the Sage 100 ERP Installation and System Administrators’ Guide for more information. 8____ If your system has custom reports, review the Custom Reports menus to make sure they are available. If they are not, add them using Report Manager. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 147
  • 158. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 9____ If dictionary changes were made to any files used for import or export jobs created in the Visual Integrator module, those jobs will need to be manually updated for modules other than Job Cost, Payroll, Material Requirements Planning, TimeCard, and Work Order. To determine if manual updates are required, review the associated file layout information using the File Layouts and Program Information link on the Resources page of the Desktop. If you are upgrading from Sage 100 Standard or Advanced ERP, review the Data Dictionary Listing accessed from the Visual Integrator Main menu. Verify that the imported field names are consistent with the new file layouts. 10____ Review the Paperless Office module configuration for e-mailing statements, reports, journals, registers, and other forms. For more information, see Set Up Paperless Office in the Help system. 11____ Review your Business Insights Dashboard pages. For more information, see Set Up Business Insights Dashboard in the Help system. 12____ To use the eBusiness Manager module, restore the copied templates back to the IW folder after re-installing the Web Engine. Copy the poweredby.gif image from the MAS90Images folder to the IIS Inetpupwwwrootimages folder and restart the IIS Web service. 13____ If you do not use taxation for purchase orders, clear the Sales Tax Reporting check box in Accounts Payable Options. 14____ If you include sales tax on purchase orders and want to enter default tax schedules for vendors, use Accounts Payable Assign Vendor Tax Schedules to set up tax schedules. 15____ Confirm in Accounts Receivable Customer Maintenance that all customers that have exemption numbers still have the exemption number defined. 16____ To unhide the Custom Financials menu and tasks, select File menu > Run and type *unhidegl in the Run Program window. For more information, See Custom Financials on page 91. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 148
  • 159. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Upgrading from Version 4.00 or 4.05 to Version 2014 17____ If you had the Extended Solution for direct deposits, verify the bank ID (bank account) number for each bank code. During conversion, if there is a discrepancy between the bank ID number in Bank Code Maintenance and the bank account number in Direct Deposit Information for a bank code, the account number in Direct Deposit Information replaces the number in Bank Code Maintenance. If an account number is not entered in Direct Deposit Information, the number in Bank Code Maintenance is entered in Direct Deposit Information. Account number changes are noted in the conversion log. 18____ Print all customized form definitions and compare them to the ones previously printed. Default forms may be erased in the upgrade process. 19____ Compare the following version 4.x and 2014 reports because sales tax may be recalculated during the conversion: Accounts Receivable Sales Tax Report, Accounts Receivable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Accounts Payable Repetitive Invoice Listing, Open Sales Order Report, and Open Purchase Order Report.If you purchased the Return Merchandise Authorization module, after setting up the data files for the first time, select Return Merchandise Authorization Setup menu > Create Customer Invoice Search Records to create customer invoice search records in RMA. 20____ To run Microsoft Script links, you must have the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor on your system. For information on installing the Microsoft Windows Script Host processor, refer to the Microsoft Download Center Web site. 21____ If you use Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, review your scheduled automatic updates and reschedule those updates by selecting Library Master Main menu > Automatic Update or Task Scheduler, as applicable. 22____ If you had task folders in your My Tasks area, re-create your Public and Private task folders. 23____ Test all printers, including Device Configurator printers, that you normally use for printing forms and reports. Each workstation must have a default printer defined. 24____ Install Sage Exchange Desktop on each workstation for each Windows user who needs to access credit card information in Sage 100 ERP. Download the installation program from the Sage Exchange Web site at: https://www.sageexchange.com/install For information on what is new in this release, see What's New in Version 2014 on page 3. Sage 100 ERP 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 149
  • 160. Index A accounting dates 87 accounts 89 Accounts Payable ACH payment 41 changes in product update 4.40.0.2 41 changes in version 2013 12 changes in version 4.20 70 data entry 71 enhancements in version 2014 4 expanded invoice number 12 global changes 70 inactive vendors 12 Invoice search button 4 period-end processing 71 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 41, 72 Repetitive Invoice search button 4 view cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance 14 wire transfers 41 Accounts Receivable changes in version 2013 14 changes in version 4.10 78 changes in version 4.20 73 changes in version 4.30 65 changes in version 4.40 42 changes in version 4.50 27 credit card processing 16 enhancements in version 2014 4 global changes 78 inactive customers 14 national accounts 27 period-end processing 78 purge credit card data 28 recalculate utility 28 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 42, 79 Repetitive Invoice search button 4 split commission 28 utility 29 ACH electronic payments viewing in Bank Reconciliation 18 activity log 38 Advanced Lookup Engine changes in version 2013 10 changes in version 4.00 86 changes in version 4.20 67 changes in version 4.40 38 allocations 90 auto-complete 3 B Bank Reconciliation changes in product update 4.40.0.2 42 changes in product update 4.40.0.3 42 changes in version 2013 18 on the fly 42 registers 42 renamed and removed tasks 42 Bar Code changes in version 4.40 43 changes in version 4.50 29 lot/serial distribution 29 Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide Bar Code (continued) renamed, removed, or moved tasks 43 batch fax 68 Bill of Materials changes in version 4.40 43 data entry 44 global changes 43 inquiry changes 44 options 43 printing 44 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 45 reports and forms 44 Business Insights changes in version 4.00 89 changes in version 4.10 79 changes in version 4.20 73 changes in version 4.30 65 changes in version 4.40 45 global changes 73 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 73, 79 Business Insights Dashboard changes in version 4.30 65 renamed tasks 73 Business Insights Explorer 73 Business Insights Explorer, changes in version 4.20 73 Business Insights Reporter 45 changes in version 4.00 89 changes in version 4.30 65 C Cash Receipts Entry inactive customers 15 Changes in version 2013 Common Information 18 Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance inactive vendors 13 checklists version 2013 data conversion 98, 104 version 2013 pre-upgrade 96, 102 version 2013 upgrade 97, 103 version 4.0 or 4.05 data conversion 146 version 4.0 or 4.05 pre-upgrade 143 version 4.0 or 4.05 upgrade 144 version 4.10 data conversion 139 version 4.10 pre-upgrade 136 version 4.10 upgrade 137 version 4.20 data conversion 131 version 4.20 pre-upgrade 128 version 4.20 upgrade 129 version 4.30 data conversion 123 version 4.30 pre-upgrade 120 version 4.30 upgrade 121 version 4.40 data conversion 115 version 4.40 pre-upgrade 113 version 4.40 upgrade 114 version 4.45 data conversion 109 version 4.45 pre-upgrade 108 version 4.45 upgrade 108 checks, cleared date 18 150
  • 161. Index D commission by customer 28 by line item 35 Common Information 45 changes in product update 4.40.0.2 45 Changes in version 2013 18 changes in version 4.10 79 changes in version 4.20 74 changes in version 4.30 65 changes in version 4.40 46 options 46 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 46, 65, 74 reports 74 companies, copying data 88 costing changes 51 Credit Card Processing related changes in Accounts Receivable 16 related changes in Sales Order 24 credit card related changes A/R Period End Processing 16 Accounts Receivable Options 16 Administrative Tools 23 Company Maintenance 22 Credit Card Audit Log 23 Customer Credit Card Maintenance 17 Customer Maintenance 17 Payment Type Maintenance 16 reports 18 Role Maintenance 23 S/O Invoice Data Entry 24 Sales Order Entry 24 User Maintenance 23 credit cards batch processing 16, 24 data storage 16, 19 swiping 16, 24 CRM Activity Log 20 CRM Company Options 20 CRM Options 20 CRM Server Options 20 custom reports 3 Customer Credit Card Maintenance credit card related changes 17 Customer Maintenance Card ID field 17 Customer Status field 14 inactive customers 14 Inactive Reason field 14 Temporary check box 14 customer numbers, expanded 39 Customer Relationship Management automatically installed 20 changes in version 2013 20 multi-company integration with Sage CRM 20 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 21 customized Crystal forms 38 Customizer changes in version 4.00 89 changes in version 4.10 80 changes in version 4.20 74 changes in version 4.40 47 global changes 47, 74, 80, 89 Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide D data dictionaries 61, 85, 93 data dictionary listing 61, 77, 85, 93 data entry General Ledger 91 in version 4.40 39 Sales Order 59 Data File Display and Maintenance 87 data file multi-segment 37 dates, accounting and module 87 Desktop 39, 67, 86 dot matrix printers 68 E eBusiness Manager changes in version 4.10 82 changes in version 4.40 48 global changes 82 Sage Web Engine 48 Electronic Reporting changes in version 4.20 75 global changes 75 e-mail encrypt with SMTP e-mail statements, setup 65 Enhancements in version 2014 Accounts Payable 4 Accounts Receivable 4 General Ledger 4 global 3 Payroll 7 Sage CRM 6 Sage Intelligence Reporting 5 expanded customer numbers 39 invoice number 12 item codes 39 export jobs 94 F fax, batch faxing 68 Fixed Assets changes in version 4.20 76 global changes 76 G General Ledger changes in version 4.00 89 changes in version 4.40 48 custom financials 91 data entry 91 enhancements in version 2014 4 Keep Financial Reports Window Open 4 period-end processing 92 renamed and removed tasks 93 reports 93 standard financials 91 151
  • 162. Index H global changes in version 2013 10 in version 4.00 86 in version 4.20 67 in version 4.30 64 in version 4.40 37 in version 4.50 26 printing in version 4.40 39 reports and forms in version 4.40 40 Global Enhancements in version 2013 Microsoft Windows Installer 11 Sage Advisor 11 SData 10 Global enhancements in version 2013 Advanced Lookup Engine 10 graphic conventions 2 H Help system 10, 67, 86 I Import Job Maintenance 61, 77, 85, 93 import jobs in Payroll 32 imported, ODB files 43 inactive customers Cash Receipts Entry 15 Customer Maintenance 14 excluding from listings and mailing labels 15 Inactive Reason Code Maintenance 18 Inactive Reason Code Maintenance 15, 18 inactive vendors 12 Check and Electronic Payment Maintenance 13 Invoice Payment Selection 13 inquiries 67 installation changes in version 4.00 86 in version 4.30 64 in version 4.40 37 installation, Microsoft Windows Installer 11 installation, parallel or in-place 26 inventory items, on the fly 60 Inventory Management changes in 4.50 29 changes in version 2013 22 changes in version 4.40 48 costing 51 global changes 49 item quantities 22 lot/serial distribution 30 options 49 period-end processing 51 physical count 50 printing 52 product lines 50 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 52 reports and forms 52 transactions 50 utilities 51 Invoice Payment Selection inactive vendors 13 Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide Invoice Search button A/P Invoice Data Entry 4 A/P Repetitive Invoice Entry 4 A/R Invoice Data Entry 4 item codes, expanded 39 Item Maintenance 50 item quantities 22 item pricing by total quantity 35 item quantities 22 J Job Cost changes in version 4.40 53 dictionary changes 53 options 53 job import changes in version 4.30 66 L Library Master changes in 4.50 30 changes in version 2013 22 changes in version 4.00 87 changes in version 4.20 68 changes in version 4.30 64 changes in version 4.40 40 credit card security 30 renamed, removed, or moved 88 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 23, 40 lot/serial distribution sales orders 36 M Manage Your System 27 manuals 67, 86 memos 73 Microsoft Windows Installer 11 migrate, Level 3.x data 86 Miscellaneous Item Maintenance 79 module option add and edit credit card information 23 Module PDFs 25 modules dates 87 registering 87 retired 63, 77, 94 MSI 11 N national accounts 27 New Report window, Report Type field 8 O Operand field 64 152
  • 163. Index P P Paperless Office changes in version 2013 24 Payroll changes in 4.50 31 changes in product update 4.40.0.5 54 changes in version 4.20 76 changes in version 4.30 66 changes in version 4.40 54 deduction options 31 direct deposit 66 enhancements in version 2014 7 import jobs 32 imports 32 recalculate deductions 31 reports 77 taxes 76 PCCharge 19 PEP 26 period-end processing, General Ledger 92 physical count changes 50 printer, report and form setting 27 printing 68 Product Enhancement Program 26 Purchase Order auto generate options 33 changes in version 4.40 54 changes in version 4.50 33 data entry 33, 56 global changes 54 options 55 period-end processing 57 printing 57 purchases history 56 registers and updates 58 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 33, 58 reports and forms 58 utilities 56 Q Quarterly 941 Printing 54 Quick Order Entry 21 R Remove Inactive Customers utility 15 Report Manager, new reports 8 Report Master changes in version 4.30 66 changes in version 4.40 63 reports e-mailing 10 General Ledger 93 global 64 SAP Crystal Reports 87 retired modules in version 2013 25 in version 2014 9 in version 4.00 94 in version 4.20 77 in version 4.40 63 Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide retired modules (continued) in version 4.50 36 RMA changes in version 4.10 82 changes in version 4.40 59 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 59, 82 roles, maintaining 64 S Sage 100 ERP Desktop 39, 67, 86 Sage Advisor 11 Sage CRM enhancements in version 2014 6 multi-company integration 20 Quick Order Entry 21 Sage Exchange 16, 19 Sage Exchange Vault-only account 19 Sage Intelligence Reporting enhancements in version 2014 5 Sage Web Engine 48 sales history 83 Sales Order changes in 4.50 34 changes in product update 4.40.0.1 59 changes in version 2013 24 changes in version 4.10 83 changes in version 4.40 60 data entry 36, 59, 60 duplicate purchase order numbers 59 global changes 83 item pricing 35 job cost integration 84 job cost options 34 line item commission 35 lot/serial distribution 35 period-end processing 84 picking sheets 60 quick print options 59 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 60 reports 60, 83 SData 10 Search Grid window 3 security credit card 30 in version 4.00 87 in version 4.50 26 requirement 26 Role Maintenance 40 roles 64 security event override credit card information 23 selection grids 64 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, see SMTP SMTP e-mail authentication in Paperless Office 24 U URL, maintaining 70 utility, recalculate amounts 28, 29 153
  • 164. Index V V Value field 64 Vault-only account, see Sage Exchange Vault-only account Vendor Maintenance inactive vendors 12 view cleared checks 14 vendors, make inactive 12 view cleared checks in Vendor Maintenance 14 Visual Integrator changes in version 2013 25 changes in version 4.00 93 changes in version 4.10 85 changes in version 4.20 77 changes in version 4.30 66 changes in version 4.40 61 data dictionaries 61, 66, 77, 85, 93 Visual Process Flows changes in version 2013 25 Visual Process Flows Manager 25 W W2 Puerto Rico Mapping E/D Codes 9 Web Reports Server 22 Work Order changes in version 4.40 62 file layouts 62 renamed, removed, or moved tasks 62 Version 2014 Customer Upgrade Guide 154